Skip to main content

Full text of "Three treatises : On the brain, the eye and the ear"

See other formats


LEEDS  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 

t 

i 

Classmark:  1 

Special  Collections 

Health  Sciences  Historical  Collection 

SC3  7V10K1 


I lilt  li  II  III  : . I II 

30106016?0fi77? 


' » 


10940 


THREE 

TREATISES. 


ON 

THE  BRAIN,  THE  EYE, 

AND 

THE  EAR. 


I L L U S T R ATED  BY  TABLES. 


BY 


ALEXANDER  MONRO,  M.  D. 

— o < 

PROFESSOR  OF  MEDICINE,  ANATOMY,  AND  SURGERY,  IN  THE  UNIVERSITY. 
OF  EDINBURGH  } FELLOW  OF  THE  ROYAL  COLLEGE  OF  PHYSICIANS, 
AND  OF  THE  ROYAL  SOCIETY,  OF  EDINBURGH  ; AND  FELLOW 
OF  THE  ROYAL  ACADEMY  OF  SURGERY  OF  PARIS. 


EDINBURGH  : 

PRINTED  FOR  BELL  & BRADFUTE  ; 

AND  FOR  G.  G.  & J.  ROBINSON,  AND  J.  JOHNSON) 
LONDON. 


M.DCC.SCVII.  • 


r 


\ ' 


* 


OBSERVATIONS 


ON  THE 

COMMUNICATION 

OF  THE 

VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN 

WITH  EACH  OTHER; 

AND  ON  THE 

INTERNAL 

HYDROCEPHALUS. 


BY 

ALEXANDER  MONRO,  M.  D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  MEDICINE,  ANATOMY,  AND  SURGERY, 
IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  EDINBURGH, 


EDINBURGH: 

PRINTED  BY  ADAM  NEILL  AND  COMPANY, 


1797* 


\ 


'GENERAL 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS* 


TREATISE  I. 

ON  THE  BRAIN, 

Page  9 

— II. 

ON  THE  EYE, 

73 

— — HR 

ON  THE  EAR, 

*77 

Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/b21516807 


A Table  of  the  Contents  of  Treatife  I. 


CHAP.  i. 

OF  the  Communication  of  the  Ventricles  of  the  Brain 
with  each  other,  in  Man  and  Quadrupeds, 
Explanation  of  the  Tables, 


CHAP.  II. 

Of  the  Situation  of  the  Water  in  the  Internal  Hydro- 
cephalus, - 


CHAP.  III. 

Of  Changes  produced  in  the  Texture  of  the  Brain  and 
Cerebellum,  in  confequence  of  Hydrocephalus  Inter- 
nus,  - - 


CHAP.  IV. 

An  Attempt  to  prove,  that  the  Changes  in  the  Texture 
of  the  Brain  and  Cerebellum,  in  confequence  of  In- 
ternal Hydrocephalus,  are  produced  by  the  Abforbent 
Veflels,  - 


Page 

9 

20 


33 


35 


41 


CHAP. 


Vlll 


CONTENTS  OF  TREATISE  I. 


CHAP,  V. 

Circumftances  enumerated,  which  prove,  that  the  Solid, 

Parts  compoling  other  Organs  of  our  Body  are  Ab- 

Pagc 

forbed,  ------  47 

CHAP.  VI. 

At  what  Time  the  Circumftances  enumerated  in  the  laffc 
Chapter  were  firlh  taught  by  the  Author,  - 55 

CHAP.  VII. 

Of  the  Cure  of  Internal  Hydrocephalus  by  Medicines,  61 

CHAP.  VIII. 

Of  the  Cure  of  Internal  Hydrocephalus  by  Chirurgical 
Operation,  - ^ - - - - 67 


TREATISE 


TREATISE 


FIRST: 


OF  THE  BRAIN. 


CHAP.  L 


Of  the  Communication  of  the  Ventricles  of 
the  Brain  with  each  other,  in  Man  and 


QO  far  back  as  the  year  1753,  foon  after  I began  the  flu- 
dy  of  Anatomy,  I difcoverecl,  that  the  Lateral  Ventricles 
of  the  Human  Brain  communicated  with  each  other,  and,  at 
the  fame  place,  with  the  Middle  or  Third  Ventricle  of  the 
Brain:  And,  as  a paffage  from  the  Third  Ventricle  to  the 
Fourth  is  univerfally  known,  it  followed,  that  what  are  called 
the  Four  Ventricles  of  the  Brain,  are  in  reality  different  parts 
of  one  cavity. 


B 


In 


je 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


In  confirmation  of  this,  I afterwards  obferved,  in  the  bodies 
of  fifteen  different  perfons  who  had  died  of  Internal  Hydro- 
cephalus, that  the  water  was  lodged  in  all  the  Ventricles  ; 
that  by  one  pundture  it  was  difcliarged  from  all  of  them ; 
and  that  the  paffages  by  which  I had  found  the  Ventricles 
communicated,  were  dilated  in  the  fame  proportion  as  the 
other  parts  of  the  Ventricles. 

If,  therefore,  there  has  been  no  miflake  in  the  obfervations 
of  thofe  who  tell  us,  that  in  Hydrocephalus  they  have  found 
the  water  confined  to  One  of  the  Lateral  Ventricles,  or  dis- 
charged by  a pundture  from  One  Ventricle,  without  emptying 
the  others ; there  muft  have  been,  previous  to  the  Dropfy,  fome 
degree  of  inflammation,  or  other  difeafe,  in  that  part  of  the 
brain,  which  had  occafioned  an  obliteration  of  their  natural 
c ommiini  cations. 

I found  likewife,  that  there  is  no  paflage,  fuch  as  Dr  Hal- 
ler, and  other  authors,  fuppofed,  (See  Haller,  El.  Phyf.  L.  x. 
S.  2.  § 6.  p.  77.  and  S.  3.  § 7.  p.  87.)  leading  from  the  Ca- 
vity of  the  Fourth  Ventricle  into  the  Cavity,  as  it  is  called, 
of  the  Spinal  Marrow,  or,  between  the  Dura  and  Pia  Mater 
of  the  Spinal  Marrow. 


In 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


11 


la  the  year  1764,  I read  a paper  on  that  fubjed  to  the  Phi- 
lofophical  Society  of  Edinburgh  : And,  in  1783,  when  I pu- 

blifhed  my  book  upon  the  Nervous  Syllem,  I gave  fuch  a 
full  defcription  of  the  Communications  of  the  Ventricles  of 
the  Brain,  illuflrated  by  figures,  that  I did  not  fuppofe  any 
perfon,  who  pretended  to  anatomical  knowledge,  could  find 
difficulty  in  tracing  by  diffedion  all  I had  defcribed. 

To  my  very  great  furprife,  however,  I have  been  informed, 
that  feveral  Teachers  of  Anatomy  in  London  have  told  their 
Pupils,  that  they  had  looked  for  fuch  paflages  in  vain ; and 
therefore  ventured  to  deny  their  exigence. 

But  I cannot  admit  their  inference  : becaufe,  in  the  firfl 
place,  I have  found,  on  repeating  my  diffedions  in  private, 
that  the  defcriptions  I publifhed  in  1783  are  fo  correct,  that 
I obferve  nothing  material  to  add  to,  or  to  alter  in  them. 

In  the  next  place,  fince  I heard  of  thofe  doubts  as  to  the 
fads  I had  defcribed,  I have  demonflrated,  annually,  to  all 
the  Students  of  Anatomy  who  have  done  me  the  honour  of 
attending  my  Ledures,  every  thing  I had  mentioned.  Par- 
ticularly, laft  winter,  after  I had  demonflrated  thefe  parts  in 
one  fubjed,  I diffeded  another,  of  which  my  affiflant  Mr 

B 2 Fyfe 


12 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


Fyfe  made  a very  accurate  drawing;  which  I fhewed  to  all 
the  Students,  who  compared  it  with  the  fubjed. 

But,  that  no  doubt  might  remain  with  the  molt  fceptical 
perfon,  I have,  this  fummer,  repeated  the  diffedion  of  a re- 
cent fubjed ; of  which,  likewife,  Mr  Fyfe  made  a very  ac- 
curate drawing,  that  correfponds  exadly  with  his  former  fi- 
gure. 

I then  afked  the  favour  of  all  my  Colleagues  of  the  Me- 
dical Faculty,  to  wit,  Dr  Black,  Dr  Home,  Dr  Ruther- 
ford, Dr  Gregory,  and  Dr  Duncan,  to  compare  the 
Drawings  with  the  parts  difieded  ; which  they  were  fo  ob- 
liging as  to  do  : And  I fubjoin  their  Declaration. 

After  they  had  fmifhed  their  comparifon  of  the  Drawing 
marked  Table  Fir  ft,  with  the  diffeded  Brain  ; I held  the 
end  of  a blow-pipe  at  the  diftance  of  half  an  inch  from 
the  hole  by  which  the  Lateral  Ventricles  communicate;  and, 
on  my  blowing  moderately,  I fhewed  them,  that  the  air 
palled  from  the  Right  into  the  Left  Lateral  Ventricle. 

I then  opened  the  Left  Lateral  Ventricle,  and  pointed  out 
to  them  the  hole  by  which  the  air  had  palled. 


I 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


13 


I afterwards  made  a Call  in  Paris  Plafter  of  the  Parts 
reprefented  in  the  Firft  Figure  : And  this  caft,  which  I 

preferve,  correfponds  exa&ly  with  the  Drawing  and  Engra- 
ving. 


DECLARATION  by  the  Professors  of  the  Facul- 
ty of  Physic  in  the  Univerbty  of  Edinburgh. 

“ We  whole  names  are  fubfcribed  hereby  declare,  That  on 
the  13th  day  of  June  1794,  Dr  Monro  demonftrated  to 
“ us,  in  the  Anatomical  Theatre,  the  Human  Brain  cut  per- 
“ pendicularly  at  the  right  tide  of  its  Septum  Lucidum ; and, 
“ along  with  it,  a Drawing  of  it,  marked  Table  Firft,  juft 
“ finilhed  by  Mr  Fyfe  : That  we  examined  and  compared 

eC  thefe  accurately  together,  and  found  them  to  correfpond 
“ in  all  refpecis  ; particularly,  we  faw  diftinctly  a hole  or 
“ paftage  by  which  the  Lateral  Ventricles  communicate  with 
each  other,  and  with  the  Third  Ventricle. 


i4 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


“ After  this,  Dr  Monro  placed  the  fmall  end  of  a com- 
n moil  blow-pipe  about  half  an  inch  from  this  hole  or  paf- 
“ fage  ; and,  on  his  blowing  air  gently,  we  faw  it  pafs  • 
u through  the  above-mentioned  hole  or  paflage  into  the  Left 
“ Lateral  Ventricle. 

11  He  afterwards  fhewed  us  the  Left  Lateral  Ventricle 

laid  open,  and  a Drawing  of  its  parts  by  Mr  Fyfe, 
u marked  Table  Second  ; and  particularly,  we  faw  the  left 
“ hde  of  the  paffage  which  makes  the  communication  be- 
ei  tween  the  Ventricles. 

» " 

u Fie  has,  lince  that  time,  fhewed  us  a Caft  in  Paris 

“ Plafter  of  the  Parts  reprefented  in  Table  Firft,  which  we 
cl  find  to  correfpond  exactly  with  the  Drawing  and  Engra- 
a ving. 

“ We  therefore  entertain  no  doubt  of  the  exiftence  of  the 
“ Communication  of  the  Lateral  Ventricles  of  the  Brain 
“ with  each  other,  and  with  the  Third  Ventricle,  defcribed 
“ by  Dr  Monro  in  the  Work  he  publifhed  on  the  Nervous 

“ Syftem  in  1783  ; and  particularly,  we  attefi;  the  accuracy 

“ of  the  Figures  and  Defcription  of  thefe  Parts  which  he 

“ fhewed 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN.  15 

“ fhewed  us,  and  which  he  propofes  to  prefent  to  the  Royal 
a Society  of  Edinburgh  for  publication. 


“ Joseph  Black,. 

“ Francis  Home. 

“ James  Gregory. 

* 

“ D,  Rutherford. 

“ Andrew  Duncan.” 


My  very  ingenious  and  intelligent  Colleague  Dr  Ruther» 
ford,  who,  as  one  of  the  ordinary  Phylicians  of  the  Royal 
Infirmary,  as  well  as  one  of  the  Clinical  Lecturers  there, 
has  had  frequent  opportunity  of  examining  this  fubjedl,  has 
very  obligingly  favoured  me  with  his  farther  atteftation  con- 
cerning it  in  the  following  Letter, 

FQ£ 


&6 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


For  Dr  Monro. 


“ Dear  Sir, 

“ I am  very  much  pleafed  with  your  Drawings  and  De- 
**  feription  of  the  Communication  of  the  Lateral  Ventricles 
“ with  each  other,  and  with  the  other  Ventricles  of  the 
“ Brain.  The  Firft  Figure  is  particularly  excellent  ; and 
“ mud;  certainly,  I fliould  think,  remove  all  doubts  refpeding 
11  the  reality  of  thefe  paflages.  It  feems  indeed  very  ftrange, 
“ that  fo  many  celebrated  Anatomifls  fliould  have  mifled  the 
“ Communication  betwixt  the  Lateral  Ventricles  , as  it  is  fo 
“ eafily  difeovered,  and  as  it  is  generally  fo  very  confpicuous 
“ when  the  Ventricles  are  dift ended  by  water  preternaturally 
“ accumulated  in  them.  Frequently,  when  examining  the 
il  Hate  of  the  Brain  in  perfons  who  had  died  in  the  Royal  In- 
“ firmary,  I have  taken  the  opportunity  of  pointing  out  this 
u Communication  to  the  Young  Gentlemen  who  were  prefent 
“ at  the  dlfleflion  ; and  have  fatisfied  fome,  that  it  was  al- 
u ways  to  be  found,  who  had  been  taught  that  no  fuch  Com- 
“ munication  exifled.  I particularly  recoiled;  one  inftance 
££  of  this.  A very  ingenious  and  well-informed  American, 

“ Mr 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN, 


17 


“ Mr  Philip  Physick,  who  got  his  degree  of  M.  D.  at  our 
“ Univerfity  two  years  ago,  and  who  had  previoufly  ap- 
“ plied  clofely  to  the  ftudy  of  Anatomy,  and  made  great 
“ proficiency  in  it,  under  fome  of  the  molt  eminent  Teach- 
“ ers  in  London,  requefted  me  to  fhew  him  the  Communica- 
“ tion  betwixt  the  Lateral  Ventricles,  as  he  had  never  been 
“ able  to  perceive  it.  I did  fo  ; and  he  viewed  it  then,  for 
“ the  fir  ft  time,  with  much  fiirprife.  It  is  not  poflible  to  mif- 
t(  take  it  for  an  accidental  laceration,  the  edge  is  fo  ex- 
“ tremely  neat,  fmooth  and  regular.  No  doubt,  it  is  more 
“ diftindt  in  fome  inftances  than  in  others  ; and  it  may  be, 
“ that,  if  the  Ventricles  were  only  juft  moift  or  without  any 
“ fenfible  quantity  of  liquid  colledfed  in  them,  the  furfaces 
“ confequently  quite  contiguous  to  each  other,  it  fbould  not 
“ be  very  apparent,  and  might  therefore  be  overlooked  by 
“ one  prepoflefled  with  the  idea  that  no  natural  communica- 
“ tion  did  there  exift.  But  I have  never  feen  the  Brain  in 
“ fuch  ftate,  but  that  it  was  very  eafy  to  perceive  it.  When 
“ water  is  preternaturally  colledled  in  the  Lateral  Ventricles,, 
“ it  is  fometimes  obferved  to  be  contained  in  much  greater 
“ quantity  in  one  of  them,  than  in  the  other  ; and  I have- 
“ feen  one  of  the  Ventricles  much  enlarged  and  full  of  water, 
“ v/hile  the  other  remained  of  its  natural  capacity  and  con- 
“ rained  hardly  any  water.  This  appearance  I fliould,  how- 

C ever, 


i8 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


“ ever,  impute,  not  to  the  obliteration  or  obflrudion  of  the 
**  communication  betwixt  them;  but  to  one  fide  of  the  Brain 
having  been  more  affeded  with  difeafe,  more  flaccid  and 
“ tender,  than  the  other ; in  confequence  of  which,  a greater 
“ exfudation  had  taken  place  from  the  veflels  of  this  part, 

v_ 

and  the  fides  of  the  Ventricle  had  yielded  more  readily  to 
the  preffure  of  the  water  as  it  was  eflufed. 


a 


u 


I remain,  with  much  refped  and  efteem, 


(C 


Dear  Sir, 


Edinburgh,  ** 
i \th  Auguji  1794.  JT 


“ Your  mofl  obedient  humble  fervant, 


il  D.  Rutherford.” 


As  the  Human  Anatomy  is  generally  illuftrated  by  a Com- 
parifon  with  other  Animals,  I next  diffeded  the  Brain  of  the 
Ox  and  of  the  Sheep,  in  the  fame  manner  ; of  which  Mr 
Fy  fe  drew  accurate  Figures.  Thefe  were  compared  with  the 
Diffeded  Brains  by  three  of  my  Colleagues,  to  wit,  Dr  Gre- 

gorv, 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


19 


gory,  Dr  Rutherford,  and  Dr  Duncan  ; who  allow  me  to 
add,  that  they  were  equally  fatisfied  with  the  Accuracy  of 
thefe  Figures. 

I found,  that  in  thefe  Animals,  (and  I have  fmce  obferved 
the  fame  in  the  Horfe  and  in  the  Whale),  the  middle  parts 
of  the  Thalami  Nervorum  Opticorum  are  incorporated  inti- 
mately, and  hence,  from  the  Paffage  by  which  the  Lateral 
Ventricles  communicate  with  each  other  and  with  the  Third 
Ventricle,  there  is  a Paflage  above,  as  well  as  below,  the 
joining  of  the  Thalami. 

As  this  joining,  and  all  other  circumflances  of  the  ftruc- 
ture,  are  fo  nearly  the  fame  in  the  Ox,  the  Horfe,  and  the 
Sheep,  I think  it  fufficient  to  publifli  the  Figure  taken  from 
the  Ox. 


G 2 


EXPLA 


20 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


EXPLANATION 

OF  THE 

TABLES. 


In  the  defcription  I am  about  to  give  of  thefe  Tables, 
I fhall  place  the  Letters  to  which  I refer,  on  an  Outline  of 
the  Tables. 


Explanation  of  Table  Firft. 


This  Table  reprefents  the  Human  Cranium  and  Ence- 
phalon, cut  perpendicularly  at  the  right  lide  of  the 
Falx  and  Septum  Lucidum. 

A A Reprefents  the  Sedion  of  the  Cranium. 

B A Sedion  of  the  Right  Frontal  Sinus. 


C 


V 


TAB.  I. 


-*-■ 


4 


• '■ 


\ 


I 


/ 


/ 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN, 


21 


G The  Forepart  of  the  Falx,  fixed  to  the  Crifia 
Galli. 

D The  Backpart  of  the  Falx,  fixed  to  the  Middle  of  the 
Tentorium,  E. 

F The  Upper  and  Anterior  Part  of  the  Cerebellum. 

G Part  of  the  Inner-fide  of  the  Left  Hemifphere  of  the 

Brain,  with  Arteries  upon  its  furface  from  the  An- 
terior Branch  of  the  Internal  Carotid  Artery. 

H H A Se&ion  of  the  Corpus  Callofum. 

I I The  Septum  Lucidum,  between  the  Lateral  Ventricles, 
in  which  there  is  no  Hole. 

K The  Middle  Part,  or  Body,  of  the  Fornix. 

L A Se&ion  of  the  Right  Pofierior  Crus  of  the  For- 
nix. 


M 


22  OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 

M A Section  of  the  Right  Anterior  Crus  of  the  For- 
nix. 

N The  Left  Anterior  Crus  of  the  Fornix. 

O A Se&ion  of  the  Anterior  Commifliira  Cerebri. 

P The  Inner-fide,  of  the  Left  Thalamus  Nervi  Optici, 
forming  the  Left  Side  of  the  Third  Ventricle. 

A Vein  running  on  the  Right  Side  of  the  Forepart  of 
the  Septum  Lucidum,  and  then  acrofs  the  Forepart 
of  the  Body  of  the  Fornix,  to  terminate  in  the  Cho- 
roid Plexus,  R,  under  the  Body  of  the  Fornix,  to 
which  the  Choroid  Plexufes  of  the  two  Lateral  Ven- 
tricles are  united. 

S An  Oval  Hole,  fituated  under  the  Anterior  Part  of 
the  Body  of  the  Fornix ; behind  the  Anterior  Crura 
of  the  Fornix  and  Commiilura  Anterior  Cerebri ; on 
the  Forepart  of  the  Joining  of  the  Choroid  Plexufes 
of  the  two  Lateral  Ventricles  of  the  Brain ; and 
over  the  Forepart  of  the  Third  Ventricle.  Hence, 


at 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


at  this  place,  the  Lateral  Ventricles  of  the  Brain 
communicate  with  each  other  and  with  the  Third 
Ventricle. 

The  Left  Optic  Nerve  cut  away  from  the  Right  at 
the  place  of  their  Jundion. 

A Blind  Sac  in  the  Left  Side  of  the  Third  Ventricle  ; 
under  the  Commifiura  Anterior,  and  between  the 
Continuation  of  the  Corpus  Callofum  and  the  Join- 
ing of  the  Left  Optic  Nerve  with  its  Thalamus. 

The  Iter  per  Infundibulum  ad  Glandulam  Pituitariam, 
between  the  Joining  of  the  Optic  Nerves  with  their 
Thalami  and  the  Corpora  Albicantia  ; a Sedion  of 
the  Right  one  of  which  is  reprefented  at  W» 

A Sedion  of  the  Tuber  Annulare. 

The  Pineal  Gland,  fixed  by  a Peduncle  on  each  fide 
to  the  Thalami  Nervorum  Opticorum,  and  by  a 
middle  Peduncle  to  Z,  the  Commifiiira  Cerebri 
Pofierior. 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


The  Nates  of  the  Right  Side  cut. 


The  Teftis  of  the  Right  Side  cut. 


The  Iter  a Tertio  ad  Quartum  Ventriculum. 

A SeClion  of  the  Right  Internal  Carotid  Artery. 


Explanation 


V 


\ 


\ 


' \ 


% 


> 


% 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


25 


Explanation  of  Table  Second. 

This  Table  reprefents  the  Cranium  and  the  Left  He- 
mifphere  of  the  Brain  of  the  fame  fubject  ; cut, 
firft,  perpendicularly,  about  the  diflance  of  a finger- 
breadth  from  the  Falx,  to  fuch  a depth  as  to  lay 
open  the  Left  Lateral  Ventricle  3 and  then  cut,  al- 
moft  horizontally,  from  the  Septum  Lucidum  and 
Left  Ventricle,  to  the  Outer-fide  of  the  Left  Hemi- 
fphere  of  the  Brain. 


A The  Sagittal  Suture  of  the  Cranium. 

B B The  Cut  Edge  of  the  Top  of  the  Cranium. 
C C An  Horizontal  Section  of  the  Cranium. 


D 


D D 


26 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


D D The  Left  Side  of  the  Falx. 

E E The  Inner- part  of  the  Left  Hemifphere,  cut  perpen- 
dicularly. 

e e The  Outer-part  of  the  Left  Hemifphere,  cut  almoft 
horizontally. 

r 

F F A perpendicular  Section  of  the  Corpus  Callofum. 

G The  Septum  Lucidum. 

H The  Middle  Part  or  Body  of  the  Fornix. 

l 

I Part  of  the  Anterior  Cornu  of  the  Lateral  Ventri- 
cle. 

K The  Poflerior  Cornu  of  the  Lateral  Ventricle. 

L The  Left  Pes  Hippocampi. 

M A Sedion  of  the  Left  Corpus  Striatum. 


N 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


27 


N A Se&ion  of  the  Left  Thalamus  Nervi  Optici. 

O The  Choroid  Plexus  of  the  Left  Ventricle. 

R Veins  running  on  the  Forepart  of  the  Septum  Luci- 
dum,  which  pafs  over  Q^,  the  Left  Anterior  Crus 
of  the  Fornix,  to  terminate  where  the  Choroid 
Plexufes  of  the  Two  Ventricles  are  joined  to  the 
Choroid  Plexus  under  the  Body  of  the  Fornix. 

S The  Left  Side  of  the  Oval  Hole  or  Paffage  by  which 
the  Lateral  Ventricles  communicate  with  each  other 
and  with  the  Third  Ventricle. 


D 2 


Explanation 


28 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


Explanation  of  Table  Third. 

This  Table  reprefents  the  Cranium  and  the  Ence- 
phalon of  an  Ox,  cut  perpendicularly  on  the  Right 
Side  of  the  Falx  Cerebri. 


A A A Section  of  the  Cranium. 

B B The  Falx,  which  is  narrower  in  proportion  to  the 
Brain  than  it  is  in  Man. 

C The  Inner  - fide  of  the  Left  Hemifphere  of  the 
Brain. 

X)  D A Se&ion  of  the  Corpus  Callofum. 


F 


TAB.  Ill 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 


29 


E The  Septum  Lucidum. 

F The  Middle  Part,  or  Body,  of  the  Fornix. 

G The  place  from  which  its  Right  Pofterior  Crus  was 

cut  off. 

H A Section  of  its  Right  Anterior  Crus. 

L A Sedicn  of  the  Anterior  Commillura  Cerebri. 

M A longitudinal  Se&ion  of  the  Right  Olfadory  Nerve, 
from  its  Origin  to  the  Ethmoid  Bone. 

N A Canal,  or  Tube,  which  begins  in  the  Forepart  of 
the  Lateral  Ventricle,  and  is  continued  obliquely 
downwards  within  the  Optic  Nerve,  enlarging  near 
to  the  End  of  the  Nerve.  The  Inner- fides  of  it 
ar'e  medullary  ; and  the  End  of  it,  which  is  fhut 
or  blind,  is  covered  with  a cineritious  Bulb,  O ; 
“from  which  the  Fibres  of  the  Olfactory  Nerve  are 
derived. 


P 


3° 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


P A thick  Medullary  Cord  cut,  by  which  the  Thalami 
of  the  Optic  Nerves  are  united* 

The  Choroid  Plexus  under  the  Body  of  the  For- 
nix. 

R An  Oval  Hole  by  which  the  Lateral  Ventricles  com- 
municate with  each  other  and  with  the  Third 
Ventricle. 

S A Palfage  leading  downwards,  between  the  Anterior 

Commiffura  Cerebri,  and  the  Joining  or  Commiflura 
of  the  Thalami  Nervorum  Opticorum. 

T A Sedion  of  the  Right  Optic  Nerve  where  it  is 

joined  to  its  Fellow. 

U A Sedion  of  the  Right  Corpus  Albicans. 

V The  Infundibulum,  between  the  Joining  of  the  Optic 
Nerves  and  the  Corpora  Albicantia. 


W 


THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN.  31 

W A Se&ion  of  the  Tuber  Annulare. 

X The  Pineal  Gland. 

Y A Se&ion  of  the  Right  Nates. 

Z A Se&ion  of  the  Right  Teftis. 

* A Sedlion  of  the  Cerebellum. 

a A Section  of  the  Commiflura  Cerebri  Poderior. 

h A Paflage,  from  the  Hole  by  which  the  Lateral  Ven~ 
tricles  communicate  with  each  other  and  with  the 
Third  Ventricle,  leading  to  c,  or  to  the  Iter  ad 
Quartum  Ventriculum. 

d The  Cavity  of  the  Fourth  Ventricle. 

e The  Spinal  Marrow,  confiding  of  two  principal 
Cords. 


/ 


32  OF  THE  COMMUNICATION,  &c. 

/ The  Bottom  of  the  Fourth  Ventricle,  fhut  by  its 
Choroid  Plexus  and  Pia  Mater  ; fo  that  there  is 
no  Communication  between  the  Cavity  of  the 
Fourth  Ventricle  and  the  Cavity  of  the  Spinal 
Marrow. 


CHAP. 


* 


\ 


A 


<► 


OF  THE  COMMUNICATION  BETWEEN 


32*' 


Explanation  of  Table  Fourth.  * 


In  this  Table,  the  Septum  Lucidum,  and  the  Fornix,  im- 
mediately behind  its  Anterior  Crura,  are  cut  acrofs,  in  order 
to  Ihew,  hill  more  fully,  the  Paflage  by  which  the  Lateral 
Ventricles  of  the  Brain  communicate  with  each  other  and 
with  the  Third  Ventricle. 

H H A Longitudinal  Section  of  the  Corpus  Callofum,  on 
the  Right  Side  of  the  Septum  Lucidum. 

I I The  Septum  Lucidum. 

K A Se&ion  of  the  Septum  Lucidum,  and  of  the  Body 
of  the  Fornix,  behind  its  Anterior  Crura. 

L The  Right  Anterior  Crus  of  the  Fornix. 

M The  Joining  of  the  Choroid  Plexufes  of  the  Lateral 
Ventricles. 

D* 


N-  A Part 


32*  THE  VENTRICLES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 

N A Part  of  the  Left  Taenia,  or  Left  Centrum  Semicir- 
culare  Geminum. 

O The  Sedtion  of  the  Commiilura  Cerebri  Anterior. 

P Part  of  the  Cavity  of  the  Left  Lateral  Ventricle. 

The  Bottom  of  the  Paflage  by  which  the  Lateral 
Ventricles  communicate  with  each  other  and  with 
the  Third  Ventricle. 

R The  Joining  of  the  Thalami  Nervorum  Opticorum,  cut. 
S The  Left  Side  of  the  Third  Ventricle. 

T The  Pafiage  downwards  to  the  Infundibulum. 

U The  Outline  of  the  Pineal  Gland. 

V W The  Outline  of  the  Right  Natis  and  Teflis,  cut. 

X The  Sedtion  of  the  Commiflura  Cerebri  Pofterior. 

Y The  Iter  ad  Quartum  Ventriculum. 


CHAP, 


CHAP.  II. 

Of  the  Situation  of  the  Water  in  the 
Internal  Hydrocephalus. 

A N Anatomifl,  reafoning  a prior e , would  be  apt  to  fup- 
^ pofe,  that  the  Water,  in  the  Hydrocephalus  Internus, 
fhould  be  as  often  found  immediately  within  the  Dura  Ma- 
ter, between  it  and  the  Outer-fide  of  the  Brain,  Cerebellum, 
and  Spinal  Marrow,  as  within  the  Ventricles  of  the  Brain. 
Experience,  however,  proves  that  it  is  generally  collected 
within  the  Ventricles  ; and,  as  I have  not  met  with  a fingle 
inftance  in  which  the  Water  was  entirely  on  the  Outer-fide 
of  the  Brain,  (although  I am  far  from  doubting  of  the  pof- 
fibility  of  the  fad),  I cannot  help  fufpeding  that  this  hap- 
pens much  more  rarely  than  is  fuppofed  by  Authors  ; and 
that  in  many  cafes,  fuppofed  to  have  been  of  this  kind,  the 

E Brain 


34  SITUATION  OF  THE  WATER  IN  HYDROCEPHALUS. 


Brain  had  been  lacerated  in  opening  the  Cranium,  and  the 
Water  by  that  means  efFufed  on  the  Surface  of  the 
Brain. 

In  many  other  cafes,  where  a great  quantity  of  it  was 
colledled  within  the  Head,  although  part  of  it  was,  during 
life,  lituated  on  the  Outer-lide  of  the  Brain,  and  run  out 
as  foon  as  the  Dura  Mater  was  cut  ; it  is  certain  that  the 
Water  had  begun  to  collect  within  the  Ventricles  of  the 
Brain,  and  had  efcaped  from  them  afterwards  in  confequence 
of  Changes  in  the  Solid  Texture  of  the  Brain,  which  1 fhall 
endeavour  to  prove,  in  the  next  Chapter,  frequently  take 
place. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  III. 


Of  Changes  produced  in  the  Texture  of 
the  Brain  and  Cerebellum,  in  confequence 
of  Hydrocephalus  Interims. 

np1  H E difeafe  named  Internal  Hydrocephalus,  in  which 
the  Water  is  at  firft  contained  within  the  Ventricles 
of  the  Brain,  has  been  divided  by  fome  Authors,  not  impro- 
perly, into  two  fpecies  j,  the  Acute , and  the  Chronic. 

In  the  Acute,  the  difeafe  generally  proves  fatal  in  lefs 
than,  the  fpace  of  a month  ; and  it  is  feldom  that  more  than 
two  or  three  ounces  of  Water  are  found  within  the  Ventri- 
cles. From  the  fmallnefs  of  the  quantity,  no  uncommon  fe- 

E 2 paration 


36 


CHANGES  PRODUCED  IN  THE  BRAIN 


paration  of  the  bones  from  each  other,  or  opening  of  the 
futures,  is  diftinguifhable. 

In  the  Chronic  fpecies  of  the  difeafe,  the  patient  furvives 
for  many  months,  fometimes  for  a year  or  two.  The  bones 
of  the  Cranium  are  feparated  from  each  other  ; in  fome 
cafes  to  a great  diftance.  In  the  foft  fpaces  between  them, 
the  undulation  of  a fluid  is  more  or  lefs  diftinguifhable,  ac- 
cording to  the  age  of  the  patient  and  progrefs  of  the  dif- 
eafe. In  a few  cafes,  I have  feen  the  bones  feparated  to  a 
conftderable  diftance  from  each  other,  although  the  difeafe 
did  not  begin  till  the  child  was  upwards  of  two  years  of 
age. 

In  this  fpecies,  from  two  to  five  pounds  of  Water  have 
often  been  found  within  the  Cranium  ; and  fometimes  a 
much  greater  quantity 

When 


* See  Bonet*  Sepulchr.  L.  i.  S.  16.  Morgagni,  Ep.  xii.  Lieutaud,  L.  3.  S.  5. 
•and  others. 


BY  INTERNAL  HYDROCEPHALUS, 


37 


When  one,  two,  or  three  pounds  only  of  Water  were  col- 
lected, it  has  been  generally  confined  within  the  Ventricles 
of  the  Brain  ; the  fides  of  which,  or  fubftance  of  the  Brain 
bounding  the  Ventricles,  were  obferved  to  be  much  thinner* 
than  they  are  in  health  : And  as  the  Bones'  at  the  top  of 

the  Cranium  are  more  loofely  connected  than  thofe  at  its 
bafe,  the  Sub  fiance  of  the  Brain  which  covers  the  Ventri- 
cles, or  the  upper  part  of  its  hemifpheres,  is  in  proportion 
more  dilated  than  the  under  part  of  the  Brain.  In  fome 
inftances,  the  Subfiance  of  the  Brain  appeared  to  be  forae- 
what  indurated  ; in  others,  it  feemed  to  be  foftened. 

Where  the  quantity  of  Water  amounted  to  five,  fix,  or 
more  pounds,  partial  Adhefions  of  the  Surface  of  the  Brain 
to  the  Dura  Mater  were  obferved  ; at  the  fame  time,  a 
quantity  run  out  on  opening  the  Cranium  and  Dura  Mater  f. 

On 


* Morgagni,  Ep.  xii.  5.  “ Cerebrum  Hydrocephalo  attenuatum.”  8.  “ Parietum 
“ Lateralium  Ventriculorum  craffitudo  vi  aquse  extenuata.”  Lieutaud,  L.  3. 
Obf.  322.  “ A mole  aquae,  Cerebrum  in  ambitu  femipollicis  craffitiem  vix  fuper- 
“ abat.” 

+ Morgagni,  Ep.  xii,  6,  “ Aqua  ad  primam  cultri  impreflionem,  cum  impetrv 
“ prorumpena.” 


38 


CHANGES  PRODUCED  IN  THE  BRAIN 


On  examining  farther,  the  Cortical  and  Medullary  Subftan- 
ces  were  found  to  be  greatly  diminifhed  in  their  bulk  and 
weight.  In  fome  cafes,  after  an  enormous  Diftenfion  of  the 
Ventricles  of  the  Brain,  large  portions  of  the  folid  Subftance 
of  the  Brain  feemed  to  have  been  deftroyed  ; and  hence, 
the  Water  was  partly  lodged  within  the  Ventricles,  and 
partly  between  the  Surface  of  the  Brain  and  the  Dura 
Mater 

In  other  cafes,  little  remained  of  the  Brain,  except  its 
invefiing  membranes,  with  fome  of  the  fuperficial  matter  ad- 
hering to  them  ; and  the  offeous  matter  of  fome  of  the 
bones  of  the  Cranium,  was  found  to  be  likewife  wafted  f. 

In 


* In  a cafe  of  a Child  (C.  Gilles,  18  months  old,)  which  occurred  in  our  In- 
firmary in  1778,  five  pounds  of  Water  were  found,  partly  within  the  Ventricles, 
and  partly  between  the  Dura  Mater  and  Brain.  The  Subftance  of  the  Brain  ap- 
peared foft  and  flabby  ; and  its  texture,  in  many  parts,  was  much  deftroyed. 


+ Lieutaud,  L.  3.  Obf.  326.  Mifcel.  Cur.  Tredecem  Aquae  librae  intra  Ven- 
triculos  et  totum  Cerebrum  nonnifi  faccum  referebat. — 327.  Ex  Hildano  Aquae 

librae 


BY  INTERNAL  HYDROCEPHALUS. 


39 


In  a foetus  Calf,  within  a few  days  of  the  common  time 
of  parturition,  I found  the  Cranium  enormoufly  dilated,  and 
nearly  of  a fpherical  figure.  On  opening  the  Cranium  and 
Dura  Mater  with  great  care,  I found  the  Arachnoid  Coat 
with  the  Pia  Mater,  both  of  the  Brain  and  Cerebellum,  in 
contad  with  the  Dura  Mater,  and  in  fome  places  adhering 
to  it.  On  cutting  thefe,  I found  thin  and  broken-like  por- 
tions of  cineritious -looking  fub  fiance  adhering  to  them  ; and, 
within  this,  upwards  of  fifteen  pounds  of  a tranfparent  wa- 
tery liquor,  a fmall  proportion  only  of  which  coagulated  on 
boiling  it.  I afterwards  cut  out  all  the  membranes  of  the 
Brain  and  Cerebellum,  with  the  cineritious-looking  matter 
adhering  to  them,  and  found  that  the  whole  weighed  only 
one  ounce  and  a half. 

In 


librae  ofto  : ipfummet  Cerebrum  in  facculum  extendebatur,  Cranium  paffim  mem- 
branofum,  potius  quam  offeum,  videbatur. — 328.  Cerebrum  in  faccum  exienfum. — 
329.  Aquae  copia  Cerebrum  ferine  obliterabat.— -332.  Ex  Kerkring.  Cerebri  loco. 
Aqua. 

Morgagni,  Ep.  xii.  5.  Cerebrum  Hydrocephalo  attenuatum.  — 8.  Cerebrum 
priroa  infpectione  nudum  eke  videbatur,  cum,  iniiar  crallioris  membranae,  adhaeref- 
ceret  undique  arcu.uae  diffolutorum  oikum  circumferentiae,  — 8.  Radicem  Cerebri 
in  fibras  cinfiuxike. 


4° 


CHANGES  PRODUCED  IN  THE  BRAIN,  &c. 


In  Sheep  labouring  under  the  difeafe  commonly  called  the 
Staggers,  I have  found  a Bag,  containing  a watery  fluid,  and 
bodies  which  have  been  luppofed  to  be  animated,  (and  which 
I have  no  doubt  are  fo),  in  one  of  the  hemifpheres  of  the 
Brain.  Over  the  Bag,  the  bottom  of  which  was  connected 
to  the  bottom  of  one  of  the  Lateral  Ventricles,  I found  the 
Medullary  and  Cineritious  Subflances  of  the  Brain  confumed, 
and  the  Bag  adhering  to  the  Pia  Mater,  and  the  Pia  Mater 
with  the  Arachnoid  Coat  adhering  to  the  Dura  Mater  ; and 
over  that  part  of  the  Dura  Mater,  the  ofleous  fubflance  of 
the  Cranium  was  wanting,  and  a membrane  feemed  to  fupply 
its  place.  On  inquiry,  I find,  that  Sheep-graziers  diftinguifli 
with  certainty  the  fituation  of  this  difeafe,  by  feeling  a foft 
place  in  the  Cranium,  at  which  they  make  a perforation,  and 
endeavour  to  extrad  the  Sac  or  Bag  ; but,  as  the  fubflance 
of  the  Brain  is  deeply  affeded  by  the  difeafe,  few  are  faved 
by  the  operation. 


CHAP. 


n 


CHAP.  IV. 

An  Attempt  to  prove,  that  the  Changes 
in. the  Texture  of  the  Brain  and  Cere* 
helium,  in  consequence  of  Internal  Hy- 
drocephalus, are  produced  by  the  Ab- 
forbent  Veffels. 

IT  T has  been,  fo  far  as  I know,  the  univerfal  opinion 
of  Anatomifts  and  Phylicians,  that,  in  the  Hydro- 
cephalus Internus,  the  Subdance  of  the  Brain  is  melted 
down  by  the  Watery  Liquor  which  is  effufed  from  the 
Arteries, 


To- 


F 


42 


CHANGES  IN  THE  BRAIN  HOW  PRODUCED. 


To  fhew  that  they  have  thought  fo,  I (hall,  at  the  foot  of 
the  page,  fubjoin  a few  quotations  from  fome  of  the  moft 
eminent  Authors 

As 


* Boneti,  Sep.  L.  i.  S.  1 6.  Obf.  n.  “ Nam  potuit  Cerebrum  per  redundans 
11  ferum  adeo  fuifle  emollitum  ut  mucus  effe  vifum  fuerit.”  S.  1 6.  Ad.  Obf.  J. 
“ Radix  Cerebri,  a perpetuo  illo  diluvio  et  feri  incubitu,  in  fibras  diffluxiffe  vide- 
“ batur.” 

'Morgagni,  de  Sed.  et  Cur.  Morb.  Ep.  xii.  5.  “ Cerebrum  in  Hydrocephalo  at- 
“ tenuatum  et  in  aquam  refolutum.” — 6.  “ Quod  fi  Cerebrum  fit  Hydrocephali 
“ aqua  diffolutum.” — 6.  Verum  quacunque  ratione  et  quocunque  ex  fonte  intra  Ce- 
« rebri  thecam  aqua  praeter  naturam  congeratur  fane  poterit,  fi  necdum  illud  con- 
il  creverit,  ejus  concretionem  fuo  mterjeQ:u  prohibere  : aut  fi  jam  concreverit ; inter 
“ ejus  particulas  fe  infinuando,  has  fenfim  magis  magisque  disjungere,  donee  ad  mi- 
“ nimas  ventum  fit,  facile  cum  aqua  permifeendas,  neque  amplius  internofeendas.”— 
6.  “ In  altero  Hydrocephalo  non  folum  disjundlionem  propemodum  perfedam  fed 
“ disjunftarum  particularum  cum  aqua  permiflionem  ipfa  indicabit  aqua  loturse  car- 
“ nium  fimilis,  praeterquam  et  crafluin  meningem  nihil  diftindti  in  diffluente  cerebro 
“ videre  licuit.’* 

Haller,  in  Elem.  Phyf.  L x.  § xxxix.  “ Quod  autem,  difToluto  in  aquam  Cere- 
11  bro  et  demurn  amiffo  vivatur,’*  &c. 

“ Eo  modo  credibiie  ell,  fenfim  quidem  Cerebrum  contabuiffe  in  aquam.” 


CHANGES  IN  THE  BRAIN  HOW  PRODUCED. 


43 


As  a confequence  of  fuch  an  opinion,  it  fhould  follow, 
that  the  Watery  Liquor  poflefled  the  farther  quality  of  ren- 
dering the  white  and  opaque  Medullary  Subftance  of  the 
Brain  tranfparent  ; and,  on  evaporating  the  water,  the  Me- 
dullary Subftance  fhould  remain  in  the  form  of  an  extradh 

But,  inftead  of  that,  we  do  not  perceive  how  the  water 
effufed  into  the  Ventricles  is  brought  in  contadt  with  the 
medullary  or  other  fubftance  of  the  Brain,  as  the  Ventricles 
are  lined  with  thin  but  denfe  membrane. — We  do  not  find 
that  we  can  diffolve  the  Medullary  Subftance  of  the  Brain  in 
the  Watery  Liquor  we  extradf  from  the  Ventricles  of  the 
Brain  of  a perfon  labouring  under  Hydrocephalus. 

When  we  heat  and  evaporate  the  Watery  Liquor  colledled 
in  Hydrocephalus,  we  are  fo  far  from  recovering  the  medul- 
lary fubftance  of  the  Brain,  that  very  little  coagulable  or 
folid  matter  is  found  in  the  refiduum  ; for  the  quantity  even 
of  the  coagulable  lymph  is  lefs  in  this  than  in  moft  other 
fpecies  of  Dropfy 

F 2 Similar 


* Boneti,  Sep.  L.  i.  S.  1 6.  Ad.  Obf.  12.  De  Hydrocephalo,  “ Aquse,  in 
11  cochleari  fenec,  nonnihil  prunis  nnpofuimus.  Non  in  gelatinatn  concrevit,  uti 

“ aqua  in  ventre  Hydiopicorum  folet,  i'ed,  poll  evaporationem,  iai  acre  reliquit.5*' 


44 


CHANGES  IN  THE  BRAIN  HOW  PRODUCED. 


Similar  Watery  Liquor,  effufed  in  the  other  fpecies  of  Drop- 
fy,  is  not  found,  nor  fuppofed,  to  poRefs  any  fuch  folvent 
power. 

I apprehend,  therefore,  that  this  hypothefis  is  to  be  en- 

r 

tirely  rejeded  ; and,  that  inflead  of  fuppofing  that  the  parts 
of  the  Brain  difappear  becaufe  they  are  melted  down  by  the 
Water,  and  rendered  pellucid,  we  are  to  imagine,  that  the 
parts  of  the  Brain  are  carried  off  by  the  Abforbent  Veffels  j 
which  are  excited  to  unufual  adion,  by  the  tendon  and  irri- 
tation which  the  Water  occahons. 

In  a cafe,  very  different  from  Dropfy,  to  which  I was 

\ 

called,  in  1784,  along  with  Dr  Charles  Webster,  I have 
likewife  feen  undoubted  proof,  that  a great  part  of  the  folid 
fub  Ranee  of  the  Brain  muR  have  been  carried  away  by  the 
Abforbent  Veflels.  The  Patient,  a Rout  man,  about  thirty 
years  of  age,  had,  for  ten  months,  complained  of  the  moR 
excruciating  pain  in  the  right  fide  of  his  Forehead.  At 
laft  he  was  feized  with  delirium,  which  terminated  in  flupor 
and  apoplexy  ; and  in  this  Rate  I found  him.  He  died 
next  day.  On  opening  his  Head,  the  Left  Hemifphere  of 
the  Brain  was  found  to  have  its  ufual  appearance  ; but  the 

Anterior 


CHANGES  IN  THE  BRAIN  HOW  PRODUCED. 


45 


Anterior  Lobe  of  the  Right  Hemi'fphere  was  of  a deep  pur- 
ple colour,  very  conliderably  indurated,  and  adhered  firmly 
to  the  Supra  Orbitar  Plate.  On  cutting  it  perpendicularly 
into  two  parts,  which  I preferve,  the  dill  inch  ion  of  Cineri- 
tious  and  Medullary  Matter  was  fcarcely  ohfervable  ; for 
the  whole  of  it  was  of  a dark  purple  colour,  nearly  uniform 
in  texture,  and  had  large  and  numerous  veflels,  filled  with 
red  blood,  in  its  compofition  refembling  the  Lungs  in  an  in- 
flamed flate  more  than  the  Brain. 

There  was  no  effufion  of  water  or  of  blood,  nor  collection 
of  purulent  matter.  It  was  therefore  evident,  that,  in  pro- 
portion to  the  enlargement  of  the  Blood-vefiels,  and  perhaps 
increafe  of  their  number,  there  mult  have  been  an  Abftrac- 
tion  of  the  Cineritious  and  Medullary  Matter  made  by  the 
Abforbent  Veflels. 

As  the  Cortical  and  Aledullary  Subftances  of  the  Brain 
are  not  evidently  compreflible,  it  follows,  that  in  the  cafes 
of  Sudden  Apoplexy,  Epilepfy,  Suffocation  from  Noxious  Va- 
pours, Drowning,  Hanging,  there  can  be  no  fuch  fenfible 
general  Enlargement  of  the  Blood-vefiels  as  has  been  fuppo- 
fed  and  defcribed  by  Authors.  But  if,  by  long-continued 

intemperance, 


46  CHANGES  IN  THE  BRAIN  HOW  PRODUCED. 


intemperance,  or  other  caufes,  the  Blood  has  been  circulated 
within  the  Head  with  more  than  ufual  violence,  there  may 
have  been  an  increafed  Abforption  or  Wafting  of  the  folid 
Subftance  of  the  Encephalon  ; and,  in  proportion  to  that, 
an  Enlargement  of  the  Blood-veflels,  and  evident  Increafe  of 
the  Quantity  of  Blood  within  the  Head. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  V 


Circumftances  enumerated,  which  prove, 
That  the  Solid  Parts  compofing  the 


fbrbed. 


rT1HAT  the  Solid  Matter  of  the  Brain  can  be  carried  off 
by  the  Abforbent  Veffels,  appears,  at  firft  fight,  an  opi- 
nion fo  incredible,  that  I fhall  endeavour  to  fupport  it  by 
the  following  Obfervations,  — which,  I apprehend,  prove  be- 
yond a doubt,  that  the  Solid  as  well  as  the  Fluid  Parts  of 
Animals  are  under  a conftant  date  of  Change. 


of  our 


(i%  The 


4b  proof  that  the  solids  are  absorbed. 

a.  The  Several  Glands  and  Glandular  Vifcera  are  often 
enlarged  and  indurated,  remain  in  that  Rate  for  a confider- 
ahle  time,  and  fometimes  return  to  their  natural  Rze  and  re- 
cover their  found  Rrudture. 

b.  Hemorrhoidal  Tumours,  which  I have  found  to  con- 
tain a great  deal  of  folid  matter,  inflead  of  being  entirely 
produced,  as  Morgagni  and  Haller  have  affirmed*,  by  a 
varicous  Rate  of  the  Veins,  after  increaRng  to  conRderable 
bulk,  difappear  almoR  entirely,  leaving  nothing  but  the  fkin 
which  covered  them. 

c.  Venereal  Excrefcences,  called  Fici,  Mori,  &c.  are  often 
removed  by  the  internal  ufe  of  Mercury. 

d.  The  glandular  body  called  Thymus,  generally  difap- 
pears,  or  is  abforbed,  before  the  fixteenth  year  of  life. 

e.  Where 


* Morgagni,  Ep.  xxxii.  io,  ir. 

Haller,  El.  Phyf.  T.  vii.  lxxiv.  S.  iv.  § xii.  p.  193. 


PROOF  THAT  THE  SOLIDS  ARE  ABSORBED. 


49 


e.  Where  the  Skin  is  extended,  and  at  the  fame  time  ir- 
ritated, by  an  abfcefs  forming  under  it  in  the  condenfed 
cellular  fubftance,  it  is  wafted,  and  fometimes  breaks  into 
holes,  feveral  days  before  the  purulent  matter  contained  in 
the  abfcefs  is  difcharged,  that  is,  before  the  matter  is  in 
contad  with  the  ftdn. 

f.  In  like  manner,  the  Flefhy  Parts  of  the  Mufcles  fome- 
times ftirink  greatly,  lofe  their  red  colour  and  fibrous  ap- 
pearance, and  feem  to  be  converted  into  white-coloured 
tough  membranes.  I have  long  had  in  my  poflefllon  a pre- 
paration, in  which  a large  portion  of  the  Apex  of  the  Left 
Ventricle  of  the  Heart  of  a Man  has  entirely  loft  its  Flefhy 
Strudure,  and  has  the  appearance  of  a white,  tough,  thin 
membrane.  Within  this  part  is  contained  a whitifh  firm 
Grume  formed  by  the  blood,  fuch  as  is  found  in  Aneuriftnal 

Sacs. In  other  inftances,  the  whole  Flefhy  Part  of  a 

Mufcle  is  removed,  without  the  application  to  it  of  fluid  or 
acrid  matter,  which  could  be  fuppofed  to  have  corroded  or 
melted  it  down  into  a liquid  ft  ate.  A remarkable  example 

of  this  kind  occurred  about  twenty  years  ago,  in  the  cafe 

of  an  eminent  Phyfician,  Dr  Au -n,  whom  I attended 

along  with  Dr  Hay  and  the  late  Dr  Hope,  and  who,  for 
upwards  of  a year  before  his  death,  had  been  diftrelfed  with 

G 

\ 


pains, 


5o 


PROOF  THAT  THE  SOLIDS  ARE  ABSORBED. 


pains  in  the  inteflines.  On  opening  his  body,  we  found, 
to  our  furprife,  that  the  diftended  Sigmoid  Flexure  of  the 
Colon  was  firmly  united  with  the  Skin,  and  that  the  Abdo- 
minal Mufcles  were  entirely  removed  from  a fpace  larger 
than  the  whole  hand  could  cover. 

In  Old  Perfons,  I have  repeatedly  found,  that  the  Cavities 
of  fome  of  the  Burfee  Mucofae  which  are  contiguous  to  Liga- 
ments, communicated  with  the  Cavities  of  the  Joints,  in  con- 
fequence  of  a Wafting  of  the  Membranes  of  the  Burfas  and 
Ligaments.  Thefe  Perfons  had  not,  in  life,  complained  of 
pain  ; no  acrid,  purulent,  or  other  liquor,  was  collected  ; 
the  fides  of  the  holes  by  which  the  communications  were 
made,  were  not  ragged,  but  fmooth  ; no  lacerated  membranes 
were  found  floating  in  the  Burfse  or  in  the  Joints  : The 

Wafle,  therefore,  could  only  have  been  produced  by  the  gra- 
dual Abforption  of  the  Particles  which  had  compofed  the 
Membranes. 

g.  But  the  moll  ftriking  proofs  that  the  Solids  may  be  Ab- 
forbed,  are  to  be  drawn  from  attention  to  the  Structure  and 
Growth  of  the  Bones,  and  to  their  Wafle  by  age  and  difeafe. 

/ 

h.  When  Powder  of  Madder  is  mixed  with  the  ordinary 
food  of  an  Animal,  it  communicates  its  colour  to  the  clear 

part 


\ 


PROOF  THAT  THE  SOLIDS  ARE  ABSORBED. 


5i 


part  of  the  Blood,  and  foon  thereafter  the  Bones  are  tinged. 
The  Red  Colour  of  the  Bone,  in  forae  degree,  depends  on 
the  Particles  of  the  Madder  mixed  with  the  Blood  in  the 
Veffels  of  the  Bone  ; but  as  I have  found,  that  the  Colour 
is  little,  indeed  not  fenfibly,  changed  by  injeding  pure  wa- 
ter into  the  Veffels,  and  wafhing  the  Blood  out  of  them,  it 
is  certain,  that  the  Colour  is  chiefly  owing  to  a Red  Earthy 
Matter  which  has  been  added  to  the  Bones  whilfl:  the  Ani- 
mal was  fed  with  the  mixture  of  Madder.  If  the  Madder 
be  withdrawn  from  the  food  of  the  Animal,  the  Red  Colour 
difappears,  which  can  only  be  by  its  Abforption. 

i.  The  Skeleton  of  a very  Old  Perfon  is  fo  much  Lighter 
than  that  of  a middle-aged  perfon  of  the  fame  ftature,  that 
the  difference  cannot  be  accounted  for  on  the  common  fup- 
pofltion  that  the  Solids  are  compaded,  and  the  Fluids  alone 
abforbed. 

k.  On  comparing  a conflderable  number  of  Sculls  of  very 
Old  Perfons,  with  an  equal  number  of  thofe  of  Middle  Age, 
I have  found,  that  they  had  loit  about  Two  Parts  of  Five 
of  their  Weight. 

G 2 


L In 


5^ 


PROOF  THAT  THE  SOLIDS  ARE  ABSORBED. 


/.  In  the  Jaw-bones  of  Old  Perfons,  befides  their  general 
lofs  of  weight  in  common  with  the  other  bones,  the  Sockets 
of  the  Teeth,  after  thefe  drop  out,  are  removed  entirely  ; fo 
that  the  Lower  Jaw-bone  lofes  nearly  one  half  of  its  depth, 
and,  upon  the  whole,  more  than  one  half  of  its  weight. 

in.  In  the  Aneurifm  of  the  Arch  of  the  Aorta,  of  which 
many  cafes  are  in  my  pofleilion,  the  Sternum,  the  Ribs,  their 
Cartilages,  the  Cartilages  of  the  Trachea  are  altered  in  their 
fhape,  and  wafted  in  their  fubftance,  long  before  the  Blood 
gets  into  contact  with  them  $ which  muft  be  owing  to  an 
increafed  Abforption. 

n . In  Venereal  Cafes,  the  Bones  fometimes  fwell  confi- 
derably,  or  Nodes  form  upon  them,  both  of  which  effects 
are  often  difperfed  by  Mercury. 

o.  In  a very  large  collection  of  Morbid  Bones  in  my  poft 
feftlon,  whilft,  in  many  inftances,  their  thicknefs  and  weight 
are  much  greater  than  in  found  bones,  in  others,  their 
weight  is  greatly  diminiftied. 

p.  In  fome  cafes  of  Ulcerous  Caries  affecting  the  lower 
end  of  the  Tibia  and  Joint  of  the  Ankle,  I have  found,  af- 
ter 


PROOF  THAT  THE  SOLIDS  ARE  ABSORBED. 


53 


ter  amputation  was  performed,  that  the  Bones  of  the  Tarfus 
and  Metatarfus,  at  a diilance  from  the  ulcer,  were  much 
Softer  and  Lighter  than  in  a found  perfon  of  the  fame 
age. 

q.  In  Rickets,  although  the  Bones,  and  particularly  their 

Extremities,  are  enlarged,  yet  the  Skeleton  of  a Rickety 
Child  is  commonly  Lighter  than  that  of  Children  of  the 
fame  age  who  are  killed  by  other  difeafes.— — In  fome  cafes 
of  Rickets,  the  Bones  become  not  only  thicker  but  heavier 
than  in  the  found  date  : In  proof  of  which,  I have  in  my 

polTeflion  the  Parietal  Bones  of  a Rickety  Perfon  which  are 
upwards  of  an  inch  in  thicknefs. 

r.  In  the  difeafe  called  Incarnation  of  Bones,  becaufe 
they  are  foft  and  may  be  cut  like  flefn,  the  Bones  become 
femitranfparent,  and  extremely  light ; and,  in  fome  cafes, 
whilft  thefe  changes  were  going  on  in  them,  it  was  obferved 
that  the  Urine  depolited  a large  quantity  of  a White 
Plaftery-looking  Sediment  ; to  which  is  added,  in  one  cafe 
of  a Woman,  of  the  name  Sue,  that  before  the  difeafe  be- 
gan, fhe  had  been  in  the  habit  of  devouring  daily  a great 
quantity  of  Sea-falt.  There  can  be  no  doubt,  therefore, 
that,  in  this  difeafe,  the  Earthy  Matter  of  the  Bones  is  car- 
ried 


54  PROOF  THAT  THE  SOLIDS  ARE  ABSORBED. 

ried  off  by  the  Abforbing  Veflels  : In  confequence  of  which, 
thofe  Bones,  or  Parts  of  Bones,  which  naturally  are  the 
hardefi:,  or  have  the  greateft  quantity  of  Earth  in  their 
compolition,  are  by  this  difeafe  rendered  the  fofteft. 

f.  From  the  whole,  it  appears,  not  only,  that  the  Solid 
Parts  of  the  Body  may  be  xAbforbed  in  confequence  of  Dif- 
eafe j but,  that  in  Health,  and  during  the  whole  Courfe  of 
Life,  there  is  fuch  a conftant  Interchange  of  the  Particles 
which  compofe  the  Solids,  by  means  of  the  Veffels  which 
Secrete  and  Abforb,  as  to  render  it  doubtful  whether  a An- 
gle Atom  remains  in  our  Bodies  which  formed  a part  of 
them  fome  years  ago. 


CHAP. 


* 


CHAP.  VI. 


At  what  Time  the  Circumftances  enu- 
merated in  the  laft  Chapter  were  firft 
taught  by  the  Author. 


late  years,  the  Abforption  of  the  Solid  Parts  of  Ani- 
mals  has  been  mentioned  by  a few  Writers  who  have 
publifhed  in  London  : And  as  Mr  John  Hunter  has  been 
quoted  by  fome  of  them,  as  the  Author  of  this  Do&rine,  I 
muft  here  obferve,  that  fo  far  back  as  the  year  1759,  and 
ever  fince  that  time,  I have  mentioned,  in  different  parts  of 
my  annual  Courfe  of  Lectures  in  this  Univerfity,  all  the  Cir- 
cumftances above  mentioned  which  relate  to  the  Bones,  and 

likewife 


56  WHEN  THE  AUTHOR  FIRST  TAUGHT  THE 


likewife  feveral  of  the  CircumBances  which  appeared  to 
prove  an  Abforption  of  the  other  Solid  Parts  and,  parti- 
cularly, I endeavoured  to  explain,  on  this  principle,  the 
Changes  which  are  produced  on  the  Sternum  and  Ribs  by 
Aneurifm,  which  Dr  William  Hunter,  at  that  time,  ac- 
counted for,  on  the  erroneous  fuppolition,  that  thefe  Bones 
wTere  melted  down  by  the  current  and  folvent  power  of  the 
Blood.  See  Med.  Obf.  and  Inq.  vol.  i.  1757,  p.  344.  “ But 

“ in  this  cafe,”  fays  he,  “ the  appearance  was  rather  as  if 
“ the  Blood  had  infenlibly  dilfolved  and  waflied  away  the 
“ SubBance  of  the  Bone,  making  greateB  havock  in  the 
“ foftefl  part  of  the  Bone,  as  we  fee  in  Bones  of  unequal 
“ texture  that  have  been  long  wafhed  by  a dropping,  or  a 
“ Bream  of  water.  Bias  the  Bone  that  property  which  fome 
“ have  afcribed  to  it,  of  diflolving  Bony  Matter  ?”  &c. 

It  is  plain,  then,  either,  that  Mr  John  Hunter  had  not, 
at  that  time,  propofed  the  Doctrine  of  the  Abforption  of 
OfTeous  Matter  5 or,  if  he  did  fo,  that  his  Brother  was  ig- 
norant of  it,  or  paid  no  regard  to  it. 

When,  near  twenty  years  thereafter,  Mr  John  Hunter 
mentioned  fuch  an  opinion  in  his  Lectures,  it  appears,  from 
the  teflimony  of  a very  fenfible  and  ingenious  gentleman, 

(Dr 


DOCTRINE  OF  THE  ABSORPTION  OF  THE  SOLIDS.  57 


(Dr  Winterbottom),  who  attended  him  then,  and  who,  in 
his  Thelis,  has  (hewn  his  difpofition  to  do  him  juftice,  that 
he  relied  his  opinion  chiefly,  if  not  folely,  on  the  circum- 
Ilance,  that  in  Growing  Animals  the  Medullary  Canal  is  en- 
larged in  its  diameter  ; which  he  took  for  granted  mud  be 
owing  to  an  Abforption  of  the  Internal  Layers  of  the  Bone, 
whilft  new  Layers  were  adding  to  its  external  part  j not 
knowing  that  the  celebrated  Du  Hamel  has,  upwards  of 
half  a century  ago,  proved  by  the  following  Ample  and  de- 
ciflve  experiment,  That  the  Diameter  of  a Bone,  as  well  as 
that  of  its  Medullary  Canal,  is  increaflng  in  Growing  Ani- 
mals, by  an  Extenfion  of  the  feveral  Layers  which  compofe 
it.  See  Mem.  de  l’Acad.  des  Sc.  1743,  p.  102.  “ J’en- 

“ tourai  1’  Os  d’  un  Pigeonneau  Vivant  avec  un  Anneau  de 
“ fll  d’argent,  qui  etoit  place  fous  les  Tendons  et  fur  le  Pe- 
“ riofle.  Je  laiflai  la  cet  Anneau,  pour  reconnoitre  ce  qui 
“ arriveroit  aux  couches  Ofleufes  deja  formees,  fuppofe 
“ qu’elles  vinflfent  a s’etendre  ; car  je  penfois  que  mon  An- 
“ neau  etoit  plus  fort  qu’il  ne  falloit  pour  reflfter  a 1’  effort 
“ que  ces  lames  Ofleufes  feroient  pour  s’etendre.  II  reflfloit 
“ en  effet  ; et  les  couches  Ofleufes,  qui  n’etoient  pas  encore 
“ fort  dures,  ne  pouvant  s’etendre  vis-a-vis  1’ Anneau,  fe  cou- 
“ perent.  Ce  qui  prouve  bien  1’ Extenfion  des  Couches  Of- 
<(  feufes,  c’efl;  qu’  ayant  difleque  la  partie,  je  trouvai,  que  le 

H “ Diametre 


5S 


WHEN  THE  AUTHOR  FIRST  TAUGHT  THE 


“ Diametre  de  l’Anneau  n’etoit  pas  plus  grand  que  celui  du 
“ Canal  Medullaire.” — — To  iliew  ftill  more  clearly,  .that 
Mr  John  Hunter  had  built  his  opinion  on  an  erroneous 
foundation,  I have  remarked,  in  many  Difeafed  Bones  in 
my  pofleflion,  in  which  the  Thicknefs  of  the  Bones  is  great- 
ly increafed,  that  the  Medullary  Canal  is  much  diminifhed. 

From  this,  and  from  Du  Hamel’s  experiment,  then,  we 

may  obferve,  that  the  Plates  of  the  Bones  may  be  extended 
in  all  directions,  or,  that  they  grow  in  length,  breadth,  and 
thicknefs. 

Dr  Winterbottom,  after  attending  Mr  John  Hunter’s 
Lectures,  ftudied  the  ufual  number  of  years  in  this  Univer- 
fity,  and  received  the  Degree  of  Do6toi\of  Medicine,  in 
1781,  after  publifhing  an  excellent  DijQertation,  De  Vafis 
Abforbentibus. 

In  this,  p.  27.  he  writes  as  follows  : 

“ § 34.  Abforbentia,  Fluida  forbere,  jamdiu  notum  ; glo- 
“ ria  autem  monftrandi  ea  Solida  quoque  haurire,  penes 
“ Monro  Anatomicum  peritiffimum  eft.  In  hanc  fenten- 
“ tiam,  uti  jamdudum  in  PraeleCtionibus  praedicavit,  multis 
‘‘  argumentis  addublus  ibat  : Sed  praefertim,  quia  Thymum 

“ glandulam 


DOCTRINE  OF  THE  ABSORPTION  OF  THE  SOLIDS.  59 


u glandulam  evanefcere  ; Ofla  Senis  multo  leviora  quam  Ju~ 
“ venis  efle  ; Terrain  Rubram,  quam  Rubia  Tinclorum  in 
“ Ofla  infert,  poll  aliquod  te'mpus  auferri  etiamque  variis 
“ in  morbis  Ofla  mollia,  diftorta,  fere  peliucida,  et  levia,  de- 
“ venire  ; imo,  aliquot  in  exemplis,  infolitam  quantitatem 
“ Sedimenti  Albidi,  Terrse  Odium  limillime,  in  Urina  fuifle 
“ inventam, — animadvertit. 

“ In  Prseledionibus,  de  eadem  re,  obfervavit  cl.  Joannes 
“ Hunter,  “ Quamvis  difficile  comprehenfu  fit  quomodo 
“ Vafa  poffint  Solida  amovere,  aeque  tamen  difficile  compre- 
“ henfu  quomodo  ea  formare  poffint,  quod  niliilo  fecius  fere 
“ omnes  credunt.” 

“ § 35.  Solida  non  minus  quam  Fluida  abforberi,  pro 
“ certo  affirmare  haud  cundor  ; namque  Ofla  Hominis,  me- 
“ dia  aetate,  plus  Ponderis  quam  Senilia,  aeque  ampla  ha- 
“ bent.  Quibufdam  in  exemplis  quoque  Atrophiae  et  Tabis, 
“ partem  offium  effie  abforptam,  inter  Audores  omnes  con- 
“ venit. 

“ § 36*  Hanc  rem  Joannes  Hunter  quam  pulcherrime 
“ fc  illuftrat,  (*in  Praeledionibus)  : “ In  Offie  Femoris  In- 

H 2 “ fantis, 


60  WHEN  THE  AUTHOR  FIRST  TAUGHT,  &c, 

“ fantis,  Cavitas  initio  perexigua  eft  ; corpore  autem  cref- 
“ cente,  amplior  evadit  : Ita,  dum  Arteriae  Terram  Offis 

“ externse  parti  adjiciunt,  Abforbentia  earn  interne  ad- 
“ imunt.” 

Dr  Winterbottom  adds,  in  a Note  f,  “ Hoc  aliter  ex- 
“ plicari  pode  equidem  non  nego  ; fed  opinio  modo  pod- 
“ ta,  etfi  non  omnind  certa,  pulchra  faltem  mihi  vide- 

•n 


a 


tur. 


CHAP.  VII- 


Of  the  Cure  of  Internal  Hydrocephalus 
by  Medicines. 

AS,  probably,  the  Particles  compofing  the  Solids  of  our 
Body  are  diffolved  by  Secreted  Fluids,  or  reduced  to  a 
Fluid  State  before  they  be  fit  for  being  abforbed  ; and  as, 
therefore,  the  Wade  of  the  Solids,  by  the  Abforption  of 
them,  mull  be  performed  by  a much  more  complex  procefs 
than  that  of  Fluids  ; we  ihould,  after  finding  proof  that  the 
Cineritious  and  Medullary  Matter  of  the  Brain  can  be  remo- 
ved by  it,  be  apt,  at  fir  ft  fight,  to  fuppofe,  that  the  Internal 
Hydrocephalus  could  be  eaftly  cured  by  Medicine.  But, 

when 


62 


OF  THE  CURE  OF  HYDROCEPHALUS 


when  we  reflect,  that  the  Diftenfion  and  Irritation,  which 
create  the  unufiial  exertion  of  the  Abforbent  Syftem,  feem  to 
operate  ft  ill  more  powerfully  on  the  Secerning  Veffels,  and 
that  whilft  the  Abforbents  are  preying  on  the  Solid  Matter 
of  the  Brain,  the  EfFufion  of  the  Watery  Liquor  is  increa- 
ling  rapidly,  we  begin  to  perceive,  that  the  Cure  mult  be 
much  more  difficult  than  ave  had  fuppofed  it  to  be  : And, 

as  we  find,  by  experience,  that  Irritation  greatly  increafes 
the  difcharge  from  exhaling  veffels,  I have  often  thought, 
that  the  lingular  Senfibility  of  the  Parts  of  the  Brain,  high- 
ly excited  by  the  Diflenlion  of  its  Ventricles  in  Hydroce- 
phalus, muft,  in  it,  render  the  chance  of  Cure  far  lefs  than 
it  is  in  other  fpecies  of  Encyfted  Dropfy. 

Of  late  years,  Mercury  has  been  much  extolled  for  the 
cure  of  Hydrocephalus  Internus  ; and  various  cafes  of  fuc- 
cefs  with  it,  even  after  the  difeafe  had  made,  conliderable 
progrefs,  have  been  publifhed. 

I fhall  fubjoin  a Summary  Account  of  the  Cafes  in  which 
I have  made  trial  of  it. 

Since  the  month  of  Augufi:  1779,  I have  attended  Twenty- 
two  Patients,  labouring  under  Internal  Hydrocephalus,  to  whom 

I 


BY  MEDICINES. 


63 


1 have  given  Mercury.  Of  thefe,  Fifteen  were  Males, 

and  Seven  Females.' Twelve  of  them  were  under  Seven 

years  of  age  : Nine  of  them  were  from  Eight  to  Fourteen 

years  of  age  : One  was  Twenty-three  years  old. Four 

of  them  lived  Five  Days  only  after  I was  called  : Nine  of 

them  furvived  Seven  or  Eight  Days  : Three  of  them  fur- 

vived  Ten  Days  : Five  of  them  furvived  Thirteen  or  Four- 
teen Days  : One,  Six  years  of  age,  furvived  Four  Months, 

without  any  fenlible  Enlargement  of  his  Head* 

In  treating  thefe  cafes,  I generally  began  with  the  appli- 
cation of  Leeches  to  the  Temples.  I then  gave  Calomel,  in 
fuch  quantity  as  to  a6t  as  a brifk  purgative.  I applied  a 
large  Blifter  to  the  Top  of  the  Head.  In  fome  cafes,  I 
kept  a portion  of  the  blidered  part  open  as  an  Iffue.  In 
others,  I applied  Blifters  in  fucceffion  to  different  parts  of 
the  Head.  In  all  of  them,  I direHed,  that  ftrong  Mercurial 
Ointment  fliould  be  carefully  rubbed  upon  the  Skin  of  the 
Legs  or  Arms,  morning  and  evening  : And,  in  feverals,  I 

added  Dofes  of  Calomel  by  the  Mouth  ; taking  care  not  to 

give  fo  much  of  it  as  to  occalion  purging. In  fome  cafes, 

I combined  the  Powder  of  Squills  with  the  Calomel ; and  in 
a few,  the  Powder  of  the  Digitalis  Purpurea. 


In 


64 


OF  THE  CURE  OF  HYDROCEPHALUS 


In  Four  of  thefe  cafes,  the  Gums  became  Red,  but  with 
little  fwelling  : In  Four  others,  the  Gums  were  not  only 
Red,  but  confiderably  fwelled.  In  Two  cafes,  there  was  a 
free  Salivation.  In  the  Boy,  fix  years  old,  who  furvived 
four  months,  a profufe  Salivation  was  kept  up  for  feven 
weeks  ; yet,  after  his  death,  Eight  Ounces  of  Water  were 
found  in  the  Ventricles  of  the  Brain,  by  Mr  Gullon,  Sur- 
geon in  Dunfermline,  under  whofe  care  he  was  after  the 

Salivation. In  none  of  the  other  cafes,  were  the  effe&s 

of  the  Mercury  diftinguifhable. 

As,  in  the  greater  number  of  the  above  cafes,  the  difeafe 
had  made  confiderable  progrefs  before  I was  called  ; and 
as  moft  of  the  Patients  furvived  but  for  a fhort  time  there- 
after ; the  Effe&s  which  the  Mercury  may  have,  if  given 
on  the  firfl  appearance  of  the  fymptoms,  are  by  no  means 
fully  determined.  And,  as  I have  repeatedly  found,  in 
other  dangerous  fpecies  of  the  Natural  Encyfled  Dropfy, 
particularly  in  Hydrothorax  and  Afcites,  that  Mercury,  com- 
bined with  Squills  or  other  diuretic  medicines,  in  fuch  quan- 
tity as  to  falivate  in  a flight  degree,  contributed  much  to 
the  relief  or  cure  of  the  Patient  ; I would  recommend  the 
farther  trial  of  it  in  Hydrocephalus.  At  the  fame  time, 

confidering 


BY  MEDICINES. 


65 


confidering  the  importance,  fenhbility,  and  delicate  tex- 
ture, of  the  parts  which  are  affecded,  and  total  failure 
in  the  cafes  I have  defcribed  j I cannot  help  fufpedding, 
that  feveral  late  Writers  are  much  too  fanguine  in  their 
expe&ation  of  removing  Hydrocephalus  by  the  ufe  of  Mer- 
cury. 


* 


I 


CHAP, 


* 


•V 


r, 


CHAP.  VIIL 


Of  the  Cure  of  Hydrocephalus  Interims 
by  Chirurgical  Operation. 


~1~7I0UR  different  States  of  the  Difeafe  may  occur,  which 
we  fhall  confider  feparately. 


m mw  rrmxt&'taL&rzJs 


i.  If,  when  the  difeafe  began,  it  was  not  attended  with 
acute  pain,  and  the  other  common  fymptoms  ; for  I think  there 
can  be  no  doubt  that  the  Patient  muft  buffer  much  more  diflrefs 
when  the  Water  is  collected  within  and  diftends  the  Ven- 

I 2 tricles, 


63 


OF  THE  CURE  OF  HYDROCEPHALUS 


tricles,  than  where  it  is  efFufed  on  the  External  Surface  of 
the  Brain  : and  if,  from  a very  evident  fluctuation  of  the 

Water,  chiefly  at  the  Bregma,  it  is  fuppofed,  that  the  Water 
is  fituated  immediately  within  the  Dura  Mater,  between  it 
and  the  Surfaces  of  the  Brain,  Cerebellum  and  Spinal  Mar- 
row : we  ought  to  punCture  the  Dura  Mater  ; as  this  can 

be  done  without  danger,  may  give  immediate  relief,  and  may 
have  fome  chance  of  producing  a cure.  The  Dura  Mater 
ought  to  be  punCtured  cautioufly  with  a Lancet,  at  the  fide 
of  the  Bregma,  or  as  far  as  pollible  from  the  Superior  Lon- 
gitudinal Sinus. 

In  my  Book  on  the  Nervous  Syftem,  Chap.  iv.  SeCt.  3. 
I have  given  the  hiftory  of  one  attempt  of  this  kind,  which 
I directed  , and  fhall  here  refer  the  Reader  to  it. 


2.  If  the  Water  be  collected,  in  fmall  quantity,  within 
the  Ventricles,  which  is  almoft  always  the  cafe  in  the 
Acute  Hydrocephalus,  the  deep  Wound  of  the  Subftance 
of  the  Brain,  which  mufl  be  inflicted  in  order  to  reach  the 
cavity  of  the  Ventricles,  would  probably  prove  fatal  direCt  - 
ly,  or  indireCtly  by  exciting  inflammation  : or,  if  it  fliould 

neither 


6g 


BY  OPERATION. 

neither  immediately  prove  fatal,  nor  excite  inflammation, 
the  Water  would  foon  be  again  collected  ; and,  of  courfe, 
the  difeafe  would,  ere  long,  terminate  in  death. 


3.  *In  the  Chronic  Species  of  Internal  Hydrocephalus, 
where  the  Head  is  enlarged  by  Water,  which  has  been  gra- 
dually collecting,  and  is  ftill  entirely  confined  within  the 
Ventricles  of  the  Brain,  fome  Authors  have  propofed,  and, 
in  a few  cafes,  have  ventured,  to  difcharge  the  Water  by 
pundture  with  a Trocar.  But,  within  a few  hours  after 
the  operation,  every  one  of  their  Patients  died  *. 


Upon 


* Ep.  Ferdinandus,  HUE  1611  “ Hydrocephalutn  infantis  incidit,  funefio 

“ eventu.”  ^ 

G.  Fabricius,  Gent.  iii.  Obf.  17.  “ Ab  Hydrocephalo  incifo,  aperto  Bregmate, 

“ mors.” 

D.  Panarolus,  in  Iatrolog.  “ In  Hydrocephalo,  a perforations  cranii  mors.” 


\ 


Wepfer 


7° 


OF  THE  CURE  OF  HYDROCEPHALUS 


Upon  the  whole  : When  we  confider  the  various  dangers 

which  muft  arife  from  the  pun&ure  of  the  fubftance  of  the 
Brain  ; from  the  unequal  bending,  preffure,  and  perhaps  la- 
ceration of  parts,  which  muft  happen  when  the  Brain  col- 
lapfes  ; from  the  admiftion  of  the  air  ; from  the  impoflibi- 
lity  of  adapting  the  Cranium  exa&ly  to  the  Brain  for  its 
fupport,  by  the  application  of  any  bandage  j — no  prudent 
Surgeon  will  embark  himfelf  in  fuch  an  attempt,  — “ Ne, 
“ quern  fervare  non  potuit,  occidifle  videatur.” 


4.  If  the  Water,  after  having  been  colledted  and  confined 
within  the  Ventricles  of  the  Brain,  fhall  have  made  its  way 
out  of  thefe,  in  confequence  of  the  deftru&ion  of  fome  of 
the  Solid  Subftance  of  the  Brain  by  the  Abforbent  Veflels, 
fo  as  to  be  lodged,  in  part,  between  the  Outer  Surface  of 

the 


Weffer,  Obf.  49.  “ Hydrocephalus,  in  Puella  quinque  annorum,  infeliciter 

“ fe£tus.” 

“ Muraltus  fruftra  tentavit  curationem  Hydrocephali  incifi.” 


Le  Cat.  Phil.  Tr.  Vol.  xlvii.  Art.  40. 


BY  OPERATION- 


l1 


the  Brain  and  the  Dura  Mater,  although  it  may  be  difcliar- 
ged  by  a pun&ure  of  the  Common  Teguments  and  Dura 
Mater  only  ; yet,  as  the  fubftance  of  the  Brain  has  been 
materially  injured  by  the  difeafe,  the  cafe  is  evidently,  in 
all  other  relpedls,  more  delperate  than  the  former. 


THE  END  OF  TREATISE  FIRST, 


• \ 


V 


I 


\ 


> 


V 


. 

. 


\ 


V 


l 


I 


MISCELLANEOUS 


OBSERVATIONS 

ON  THE 

STRUCTURE  AND  FUNCTIONS 

OF  THE 


EYES,- 


BY 

ALEXANDER  MONRO,  M.  D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  MEDICINE,  ANATOMY,  AND  SURGERY, 
IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  EDINBURGH. 

s-  ■ 

I 

EDINBURGH : 

PRINTED  BY  ADAM  NEILL  AND  COMPANY, 


1797* 


\ 


A Table  of  the  Contents  of 


INTRODUCTION, 


Treatife  II. 

Page 

77 


CHAP.  I. 

Of  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  - 79 

CHAP.  II. 

Of  the  Cryftalline  Lens,  - - 83 

Sect.  I.  Of  the  Capfule  of  the  Lens,  - - - ib, 

II.  Of  the  Samdure  of  the  Body  of  the  Lens,  and  Whe- 
ther the  Fibres  which  enter  into  its  Compofition 
are  Mufcular  ? - - - - 85 

— — — HI.  Of  the  Refractive  Power  of  the  Lens,  - 87 

CHAP.  III. 

Of  the  Optic  Nerves  and  Retina,  - 91 

Sect.  I.  Of  the  Joining  of  the  Optic  Nerves,  - - ib. 

4 II.  Of  the  Infenfibility  and  Excentricity  of . the  Optic 

Nerves  at  their  Entrance  into  the  Eyeballs,  - 92 

- — - III.  Of  the  Texture  of  the  Retina,  - - 93 

— — IV.  Of  the  Termination  of  the  Retina,  94 

CHAP.  IV. 

Of  the  Choroid  Coat  and  its  Ciliary  Procefles,  103 
CHAP.  V. 

Of  the  Iris,  - - 107 

Sect.  I.  Of  the  Bloodveffels  of  the  Iris,  - - ib. 

■ II.  Of  the  Nerves  of  the  Iris,  - - - 109 

— III.  Of  the  Mufcular  Strudure  of  the  Iris,  - - no 


CHAP. 


76  CONTENTS  OF  TREATISE  II. 

CHAP.  VI. 

Page 

Of  the  Veflels  of  the  Cornea,  - 117 


CHAP.  VII. 

Of  certain  Laws,  by  which  we  judge  of  the  Pofition 
and  DifLance  of  Objeds,  and  by  which  we  regulate 
the  Motions  of  the  Eyes,  - - - - 119 


CHAP.  VIII. 

Of  the  Means  by  which  the  Eye  accommodates  itfelf 
to  the  Diflances  of  Objects,  - - - 125 

Sect.  I.  Of  the  Effects  of  the  Fibres  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens,  126 

— — - II.  Of  the  Effects  of  the  Ciliary  Procefies  of  the  Choroid 

Coat,  - - - - - 127 

" IIL"l0f  the  Effects  of  the  Iris,.  - 128 

IV.  J 

-= — - V.  Of  the  Effects  of  the  Redi  Mufcles,  - - 129 

- — — VI.  Of  the  Effects  of  the  Oblique  Mufcles,  - 131 

VII.  Of  the  Effeds  of  the  Orbicularis  Palpebrarum,  - 132 

VIII.  Conclulion  on  this  Subjed,  - 137 


CHAP.  IX. 

Of  the  Lachrymal  Paffages,  - 139 

Sect.  I.  Of  the  Duels  of  the  Lachrymal  Gland,  - ib. 

II.  Of  the  Punda  Lachrymalia,  and  Duds  from  them  to 

the  Nofe,  - - 141 

III.  Of  the  Dudus  Incifivi,  - ib. 


Explanation  of  the  Tables,  - 145 


TREATISE 


TREATISE  SECOND: 


OF  THE  EYES. 


INTRODUCTION. 


TN  this  Paper,  I fhall  briefly  Rate  Tome  material  circum- 
fiances,  refpecling  the  Structure  and  Functions  of  the 
Eyes,  which  have  efcaped  the  obfervation  of  Authors  ; or, 
concerning  which,  erroneous  opinions  have,  I apprehend, 
been  entertained  by  them  : And  I fhall  begin  with  Remarks 
on  the  Humours  of  the  Eye,  and  from  thefe  fhall  proceed 
outwards,  as  I have  found  that  a Demonftration  or  Defc op- 
tion in  this  order  is  the  moffc  intelligible. 


K 


C H A P, 


/ 


I 


o' 


♦ 


4 


CHAP.  I. 


■nr 


Of  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour. 


H|P FIE  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  from  the  Bottom 
of  the  Eyeball  till  it  gets  forwards  as  far  as  to  the 
Roots  of  the  Ciliary  Procefles,  is  fo  extremely  thin  and  deli- 
cate, that  it  can  fcarcely  be  demonftrated  by  Diffedtion ; and, 
fo  far,  it  has  very  little  adhefion  to  the  Retina  which  covers 
it. 

Within  the  Roots  of  the  Ciliary  Proceffes,  it  adheres 
clofeiy  to  the  Retina  ; and,  a little  farther  forwards,  it  feems 
to  divide  into  two  diftindt  Layers.  The  External  continues 
to  be  glued  to  the  Retina,  and  accompanies  it  to  its  termina- 

K 2 tion, 


So  OF  THE  CAPSULE  OF  THE  VITREOUS  HUMOUR. 


tion,  which  we  (hall  find  to  be  in  the  Forepart  of  the  Cap- 

fule  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens,  about  one-twentieth  of  an  inch 

« 

from  its  outer  edge  : The  Internal  Layer  adheres  firmly  to 

the  Vitreous  Humour,  till  this  is  connected  with  the  poflerior 
part  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Lens,  at  the  like  diflance,  nearly, 
of  one-twentieth  of  an  inch  from  its  outer  edge  ; and  at  the 
diflance,  therefore,  of  one-tenth  of  an  inch  from  the  con- 
nexion of  its  Anterior  Layer  and  Retina  with  the  Lens. 
The  outer  edge,  therefore,  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens,  covered 
with  its  proper  Capfule  only,  occupies  a fpace  nearly  one- 
tenth  of  an  inch  in  breadth,  between  the  two  Layers  of  the 
Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour. 

The  Anterior  Layer  of  the  Vitreous  Humour  being  fixed  to 
the  Cryflalline  Lens,  at  the  diflance,  nearly,  of  one-tenth 
of  an  inch  from  the  attachment  of  its  Poflerior  Layer,  — ■ 
a Canal,  bounded  by  the  Two  Layers  of  the  Vitreous  Hu- 
mour, and  by  the  edge  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens,  as  its  balls, 
is  formed,  which  was  difcovered  by  Dr  Petit,  and  is  named 
after  him  *.  Air,  blown  into  this  fpace,  paffes,  of  courfe, 

around 


* Mem.  de  I’Acad.  des  Sciences,  1726, 


OF  THE  CAPSULE  OF  THE  VITREOUS  HUMOUR,  81 

around  the  Cryftaliine  Lens.  Each  of  the  Two  Layers  of 
the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  is  tougher  than  the 
pofterior  part  of  the  Capfule,  and  adheres  firmly  to  the  Cap- 
fule of  the  Lens 


CHAP, 


* See  Table  I.  Fig.  3.  4.  5. 


, 


i 


I 


/ 


CHAP.  II. 


Of  the  Cryftalline  Lens* 


SECT.  i. 

Of  the  Capfule  of  the  Cryjlalline  Lens . 

i I ''HE  Capfule  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens,  is  of  conftderable 
thicknefs  but  has  little  toughnefs,  or  is  eaftly  cut  or 
lacerated. 

The  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  by  its  divifion  into 
the  Two  Layers  I have  defcribed,  has  been  fuppofed  to  form 
it  But  this  is  an  erroneous  opinion  ; for,  it  is  not  only 

much 


ii 


* Winslow,  Traite  de  la  Tete,  235.  “ La  Capfule  Cryftallaine  eft  formee 

par  la  Duplicature  de  la  Tunique  Vitre'e,  comme  j’  ai  dit,  229.” 


§4 


OF  THE  CRYSTALLINE  LENS. 


much  Thicker  than  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  but 
is  found  on  the  Outer  Edge  of  the  Lens,  covering  that  part 
of  it  which  lies  between  the  Anterior  and  Pofterior  Layers 
of  the  Vitreous  Capfule,  and  which  is  not  covered  by 
thefe. 

Oculifts,  founding  on  the  Divifion  of  the  Capfule  of  the 
Vitreous  Humour  into  Two  Layers,  which  pafs  to  the  fore 
and  back  parts  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Lens,  have  conlidered 
thefe  as  Membranes  fuperadded,  and  loofely  connected  to  the 
Capfule  of  the  Lens  ; and  therefore  pretend  to  detach  the 
Lens,  in  its  proper  Capfule,  from  the  Pofterior  Layer  of  the 
Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  without  lacerating  it,  or 
breaking  the  Subfiance  of  the  Vitreous  Humour  *.  But,  in 
faft,  Both  Layers  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  LIumour 
are  fo  intimately  connected  to,  and  incorporated  with,  the 
Capfule  of  the  Lens,  that  the  Pofterior  Part  of  the  Capfule 
of  the  Lens  cannot  be  feparated  from  that  of  the  Vitreous 
LIumour,  without  tearing  it,  and,  with  it,  the  Subfiance  of 
the  Vitreous  Humour. 

• 

SECT. 


* Mr.  da  Wenzel,  on  the  Catarad,  Sed.  xxvi. 


OF  THE  CRYSTALLINE  LENS. 


35 


SECT.  II. 

Of  the  Structure  of  the  Body  of  the  Cryjlalline  Lens,  and  Whether 

the  Fibres  which  enter  into  its  compofition  are  Mufcular  P 

\ 

It  has  been  long  known,  that  the  Cryftalline  Lens  confifts 
of  Lamellae,  which  are  very  foft  and  tender  on  its  furface, 
but  become  firmer,  tougher,  and  heavier,  as  we  approach 
to  its  centre  ; and  that  the  Lamellae  are  compofed  of 
Fibres. 

Leeuwenhoek,  who  firft  obferved  the  Fibrous  Structure 
of  the  Lens,  has  defcribed  them  as  difpofed  in  a very  com- 
plex and  regular  manner,  and  he  fuppofed  them  to  be  Muf- 
cular ; and  this  defcription  and  opinion  have  of  late  been 
revived. 

I had,  many  years  ago,  examined  and  demondrated  the 
Fibrous  Stru&ure  of  the  Lens,  in  the  different  dalles  of 
Animals,  which  I mentioned  in  my  Book  on  Fillies,  Ch.  XI.  5 
and,  lately,  I have  repeated  my  obfervations,  with  the  aid 
of  the  Microfcope,  without  finding  that  the  Fibres  are  dif- 

L pofed  ' 


8o 


OF  THE  CRYSTALLINE  LENS. 


pofed  in  the  regular  manner  which  has  been  defcribed  and 
delineated  with  fo  much  feeming  accuracy,  or  that  they  can 
be  at  all  been  till  after  the  Lens  is  torn  or  cut  : and,  be- 

lides  their  Want  of  Refeinblance  to  Mufcle  and  Tendon,  the 
following  arguments  appear  to  me  to  render  the  opinion  of 
their  being  Mufcular  extremely  queftionable. 

1.  After  the  Crydalline  Lens  is  extracted,  the  Eye,  affill- 

ed  by  a Common  Lens,  feems  capable  of  adapting  itfelf  to 
different  diliances.  In  Two  Cafes  I examined,  above  twenty 
years  ago,  it  appeared  to  be  fo  : At  the  fame  time,  I mud 

acknowledge  I could  not  trull  fo  entirely  to  the  report  of 
the  patients  as  to  be  fully  convinced  of  this. 

2.  I fhall,  in  a following  part  of  this  Paper,  endeavour  to 
prove,  that  we  polfefs  other  means  of  accommodating  the 
Eye  to  objeds  placed  at  different  diflances. 

3.  The  External  Lamellae  of  the  Lens,  and  the  Matter 
which  connects  the  Lens  with  its  Capfule,  are  fo  extremely 
Soft,  that  fuch  a degree  of  mufcular  a&ion  of  thefe  Fibres 
as  could  occalion  any  alteration  of  its  general  fhape,  could 
fcarcely  fail  to  lacerate  the  external  part  of  the  Lens,  and 
to  detach  it  from  its  Capfule. 


4.  In 


OF  THE  CRYSTALLINE  LENS. 


87 


4.  In  Fifties,  where  thefe  Fibres  are  more  manifeft  than 
in  other  Animals,  as  the  Cryftalline  Lens  is  nearly  fpherical, 
and  the  Matter  compofing  it  nearly  incompreflible,  the  Fibres 
compofing  its  Lamellae,  although  they  poffefied  a Mufcular 
Power,  could  neither  change  its  Spherical  Figure,  nor  render 
it  more  Convex  by  leflening  the  Diameter  or  Bulk  of  the 
Sphere. 


SECT.  III. 

Of  the  Refractive  Power  of  the  Cryjlalline  Lens. 

It  has  been  very  generally  fuppofed,  by  Anatomifts  and  by 
Opticians,  that  the  Refractive  Power  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens, 
compared  with  that  of  Water,  is  proportioned  nearly  to  its 
denfity  5 or,  that  its  power  exceeds  that  of  WTater  fomewhat, 
on  account  of  the  Inflammable  Matter  which  enters  into  its 
compofition  But  different  confiderations,  and  particular- 

• L 2 ly, 


* Haller,  in  Elem.  Phyf.  Vol.  v.  Lib.  xvi.  p.  402.  “ Parvam  eiTe  qua  aquam 

f‘  fuperat,  prseiogadvam,  nuperi  fatentur.  Erit  tamen  aliqua,  et  ex  ponderis  ra* 

“ done, 


88 


OF  THE  CRYSTALLINE  LENS. 


ly,  that  the  rays  of  light  cannot  be  refradted  on  entering 
the  Cornea  in  Fifhes,  and  therefore  that  their  Cryftalline 
Lens,  which  is  not  more  diftant  from  the  Retina  than  in 
Land  Animals,  mu  ft  poflefs  much  greater  power  of  Refrac- 
tion, — having  led  me  to  fufpedt  an  error  in  the  common 
opinion,  and  to  put  this  highly  curious  point  of  Phyfiology 
to  the  teft  of  experiment,  I difcovered,  That  the  SjDherical 
Nucleus  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens  of  the  Cod,  which,  in  fpe- 
cific  gravity,  is  to  Water  nearly  as  6 to  5,  and  to  common 
white  Glafs  as  3 only  to  to,  colleds  the  Light  fo  much 
more  powerfully  than  Water  or  Glafs  does,  that  its  Focus 
is  not  more  than  one-fixth  part  of  its  Diameter  diftant  from 
its  Surface  ; whereas  the  Focus  of  the  Rays  collected  by  a 
Glafs  Sphere,  is  at  the  diftance  of  one-fourth  of  the  Dia- 
meter of  the  Sphere  ; and  the  Focus  of  the  Rays  colleded 

by 


“ tione,  quae  tamen  fere  fit  ut  u ad  io,  et  particularum  inflammabilium.  An- 

“ gulum  incidentias  radii  ex  humore  aqueo  in  lentem  venientis,  ad  angulum  re- 

“ fradtionis,  facit  uti  87  ad  85,  cl.  Porterfield  : Eandem  rationem  seftimat 

“ cl  Pembertonus,  uti  13  ad  12;  et  uti  21  ad  20,  cl.  Wintringham.”  And 

Dr  Porterfield  adds,  “ This  is  a furprifingly  fmall  refradtion,  and  yet  it  is  as 
“ certain  as  any  thing  in  Euclid,  that  it  can  be  no  greater.” 


OF  THE  CRYSTALLINE  LENS, 


89 


by  a Sphere  of  Water,  is  diftant  from  it  one-half  of  its 
Diameter  *. 

On  performing  a fimilar  experiment  with  the  Human  Cry- 
ftalline  Lens,  I found,  that  the  Focus,  of  parallel  rays  of 
light  falling  on  it,  is  at  the  diftance  of  three-eighths  of  an 
inch  from  its  Centre. 

But,  although  this  fhews,  that  its  powers  are  far  inferior 
to  thofe  of  the  Lens  of  the  Fifh,  and  even  to  thofe  of  Glafs, 
which,  of  the  fame  fize  and  fhape,  would  colled;  the  light  at 

the  diftance  of  a quarter  of  an  inchf;  yet,  as  the  Specific 

/ 

Weight  of  the  Human  Lens  does  not  exceed  that  of  Water 
above  a tenth  part,  its  powers  are  much  greater  than  have 
been  fuppofed  by  Authors  j and  the  Focus  formed  by  the 
Human  Lens,  will  be  found  to  be  fituated,  nearly,  half-way 
between  thofe  produced  by  Glafs  and  Water. 


CHAP, 


* For  a more  particular  Account  of  my  Experiments,  I fhall  refer  to  my  Book 
on  the  Stru&ure  and  Fhyfiology  of  Fifties,  1785, — Chap.  xi. 

t In  this  calculation,  I fuppofe  that  the  Radius  of  the  Sphere  of  which  the  An- 
terior Part  of  the  Lens  is  a portion,  is  7f  lines  in  length,  and  that  of  its  Poftericr 
Part  5 lines  only. 


/ ' 


V 


/ 


CHAP.  Ill 


Of  the  Optic  Nerves  and  Retina. 


ir|HHE  Optic  Nerves  have,  in  their  whole  courfe,  lefs  ap~ 
pearance  of  a Fibrous  Stru&ure  than  perhaps  any  other 
pair  of  Nerves  in  the  Human  Body. 


SECT.  L 

FIence,  although  it  appears  to  me  evident,  that  the  Me- 
dullary Matter  of  the  Right  Nerve  is  incorporated  with  that 
of  the  Left,  where  they  are  connected  within  the  Head,  yet 
1 have  found  it  very  difficult,  if  not  impoffible,  to  determine 

ini 


92 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


in  what  proportion  of  parts  the  mixture  is  made,  or  to  trace 
either  of  the  Nerves,  with  certainty,  from  its  Origin  to  its 
Termination  in  the  Retina. 


SECT.  II. 

Mariotte,  above  a century  ago,  has,  by  an  ingenious  ex- 

ft 

periment,  proved,  that  we  are  infenhble  of  an  objed  if  its 
pidure  falls  on  the  Entrance  of  the  Optic  Nerve  into  the 
Eyeball.  On  repeating  this  experiment,  many  years  ago,  I 
found,  that  the  Diameter  of  the  Objed  which  difappears  is 
very  nearly  equal  to  one-ninth  part  of  our  diftance  from  it  j 
or,  that,  at  the  diftance  of  Nine  Feet  from  a wall,  a Circle 
One  Foot  in  Diameter  is  loft.  If,  therefore,  we  fuppofe  the 
Human  Eye  to  be  One  Inch  or  Twelve  Lines  in  Diameter, 
and  that  the  Rays  of  Light,  iftuing  from  the  Objed,  decuf- 
fate  about  the  Centre  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens,  which  is  near- 
ly Three  Lines  behind  the  Cornea,  or  Nine  Lines  from  the 
Retina,  — the  infenfible  Spot  on  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye  will 
be  One  Line  in  Diameter  ; and  with  this  calculation  I 
found  that  the  adual  meafurement  of  the  Medullary  Part 
of  the  Optic  Nerve  agrees  very  nearly. 


I 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


93 


I next  found,  that  an  objedl  begins  to  difappear,  when  the 
point  to  which  the  Eye  is  directed,  is  One-fourth  of  the  di- 
ftance  of  the  Eye  from  it  ; and  hence,  upon  the  fuppohtion 
above  Rated,  the  Axis  of  the  Eyeball  will  be  found  to  be 
Two  Lines  and  a Quarter  from  the  Outer  Side  of  the  Op- 
tic Nerve,  and  Two  Lines  and  Three  Quarters  from  its 
Centre. 


SECT.  III. 

When  the  Nerves,  after  entering  the  Eyeballs,  form  the 
Retina,  their  Colour  is  changed  from  White  to  Cineritious  ; 
but  no  Fibres  are  to  be  feen  in  the  Human  Retina,  even 
with  the  Microfcope  ; but  the  whole  appears  to  be  com- 
pofed  of  an  Uniform  Pulpy  Matter,  on  the  Outer  Side  of 
which,  chiefly,  Veffels  are  difperfed,  fupported,  as  I fuppofe, 
by  a Membrane  the  fame  with  or  analogous  to  the  Pia 
Mater.  The  term  Retina  is  therefore  improper,  where  it  is 
applied  to  exprefs  a Network  or  Fibrous  Texture. 


M 


SECT. 


94 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


SECT.  IV. 

Of  the  'Termination  of  the  Retina. 

Not  long  after  I began  to  Rudy  Anatomy,  finding  very 
contradidtoy  accounts  of  the  Termination  of  the  Retina, 
given  by  the  moR  eminent  Authors  *,  and  even  by  the  fame 

Authors, 


'*  Winslow,  Traite  de  la  Tete,  237.:  “ C’eft  peut-etre  cette  continuation 

“ qui  fait  quelquefois  paroitre  les  Feuillets  ou  Procefies  Ciliaires  com  me  revetus 
“ d’une  Pellicule  Blanchatre  ; et  c’efl:  peut-etre,  auffi,  ce  qui  augmente  l’epaifieur 
« de  la  portion  anterieure  de  la  Capfule  Cryftallaine.”  Yet,  in  p.  231.  he  de- 
fcribes  the  Black  Paint  of  the  Choroid  Coat  as  connected  with  the  Capfule  of  the 
Vitreous  Humour,  inftead  of  the  Retina  : “ Les  Sillons  Rayonne's  de  la  Tunique 

<4  Vitree  font  tout  a fait  Noirs.” 

Haller,  Pr.  Lin.  dxv.  : “ Ubi  vero  Retina  ad  Procefius  Ciliares  pervenit, 

“ feauitur  eorum  duclum,  et  ad  Lentem  properat,  in  hujus  Capfulam  innata,  et 
11  huic  obdudta,  fi  fides  et  aliorum  cl.  Virorum  et  meis  experimentis  haberi  poteft  : 
“ neque  enim  de  eo  fine  in  Quadrupedibus  conftat.”  But,  in  a later  Work,  he 
expreffes  his  doubts  of  the  accuracy  of  the  above  defcription : El.  Phyf.  Lib.  xvi. 

p.  388.  “ Omnibus  perpenfis,  amplio,  ei  fententiae  propior  quae  Membranulam  a 

‘s  Retina  diverfam,  inter  Uveam  et  Vitream,  ad  Lentem  producit.” 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


95 


Authors,  as  Drs  Haller  and  Winslow,  I examined  this 
matter  with  fome  care  in  the  Human  Eye  ; and  it  then  ap- 
peared to  me,  that  the  Retina  terminated  abruptly  about  the 
Root  of  the  Ciliary  Procefles,  refembling  the  Brim  of  a Tea- 
Cup  : And,  as  the  opinion  of  Winslow,  Ferrein,  and,  at 

that  time,  of  Dr  Haller,  that  it  was  fixed  to  and  covreied 
the  Cryflalline  Lens,  appeared  to  me  incredible,  becaufe  it 
would  have  been  flruck  with  the  Light,  before  this  was  col- 
lected into  a Focus  or  Picture  ; and  as  a Figure,  publiihed, 
fome  time  thereafter,  by  the  generally  accurate  Zinn* **,  feemed 
to  correfpond  with  what  I had  feen,  I profecuted  the  fub- 
jeCt  with  lefs  attention  than  perhaps  I fhould  otherwife  have 
done. 

Lately,  I afked  the  favour  of  my  very  dexterous  and  ac- 
curate Alliftant,  Mr  Fyfe,  to  repeat  the  duTeCtion  of  the 
Eye,  in  the  Ox  as  well  as  in  the  Human  Body,  and  to  draw 
-a  Figure  of  the  Termination  of  the  Retina.  His  fir  ft  Figure 

M 2 correfponded 


* Zinn,  Tab.  ii.  Fig.  i.  and  in  Cap.  iii.  p.  u 6.  lin.  13.  “ Ad  Originem 
tl  Procefluum  Ciliarium,  non  fenfim  evanefcere,  led  Fine  ubique  requali  et  ac- 

**  curate  limitato  terminari.” 


/ 


96 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


correfponded  with  what  I had  obferved  : But  he  told  me,, 

afterwards,  That,  on  being  ftill  more  cautious  in  his  di flec- 
tion, the  Retina  appeared  to  him  to  be  continued  on  tlie- 
Inner  Side  of  the  Ciliary  Procefles,  and  to  terminate  in  the 
Outer  Edge  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens.  On  reviewing  the 
fubjed:,  I obferved,  beyond  all  doubt,  that  this  is  the  cafe  ^ 
and  likewife  difcovered  the  caufes  of  the  error  into  which 
I had  fallen  with  Dr  Zinn.  In  the  firfl:  place,  When  the 
Continuation  of  the  Choroid  Coat  and  Ciliary  Procefles  is 
lifted  up,  the  Black  Paint,  which  lines  thefe,  adheres  to  and 
conceals  the  Retina.  In  the  next  place,  The  Retina  has  fo 
much  fupport  from  the  Paint  on  its  Outer  Side,  and  fitch  a 
degree  of  Adhehon,  firfl;  to  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Hu- 
mour, and  then  to  the  Edge  of  the  Lens,  and  has  fo  little 
Connedion  to  the  Choroid  Coat  behind  the  Root  of  the  Ci- 
liary Procefles,  that,  in  the  courfe  of  the  diflection,  a flight 
Prefiure  being  made,  the  Retina  is  lacerated,  and  appears  to 
terminate  abruptly  at  the  Root  of  the  Ciliary  Procefles. 

To  fhew  the  Termination  of  the  Retina  in  the  Outer 
Edge  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens,  let  the  Eye  be  laid  on  the 
Cornea,  and  a Circular  Cut  then  made,  through  all  the  Coats 
of  the  Eye  and  Vitreous  Humour,  behind  the  Ciliary  Circle  ; 

the 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


97 


the  Retina  will  then  be  feen,  lining  the  Black  Paint  upon 
the  Ciliary  Proceffes,  and  palling  from  thefe  to  the  Lens. 

Next,  let  the  Cornea  and  Sclerotic  be  taken  off,  the  Iris 
cut  away,  and  the  Ciliary  Proceffes  raifed  off  from  the  Paint 
which  lines  them  and  flicks  to  the  Anterior  Part  of  the  Re- 
tina ; and  then,  with  a very  foft  Pencil,  dipt  in  water,  let 
the  Black  Paint  be  brufhed  off,  and  the  whole  Courfe  of  the 
Retina  will  be  feen  diftindly. 

On  examining  the  Retina  with  rtill  greater  accuracy,  it 
appears,  that  it  has  exadly  the  fame  Number  of  Folds  or 
Doublings  that  the  Choroid  Coat  has  for  it  enters  Double 
between  the  Ciliary  Proceffes,  nearly  in  the  fame  way  that 
the  Pia  Mater  enters  into  the  Furrows  of  the  Brain.  The 
Furrows  and  Doublings  of  the  Retina,  which,  if  we  are  to 
ufe  the  favourite  term  of  Ciliary , may  be  called  its  Ciliary 
Proceffes,  make  an  impreffion  on  the  Anterior  Part  of  the 
Vitreous  Humour* 

I have  already  obferved,  that  the  Black'  Paint  lining  the 
Ciliary  Proceffes  of  the  Choroid  Coat,  has  a confiderable  ad- 
hefion  to  the  Retina,  which  Is  Thinner  here  than  on  the 
Pofterior  Part  of  the  Vitreous  Humour- 5 and,  on  its  Inner 

Side,,, 


♦ 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


Side,  the  Retina  adheres  dill  more  firmly  to  the  Coat  of  the 
Vitreous  Humour,  which  is  much  Tougher  here  than  it  is 
where  it  covers  the  Back  Part  of  the  Vitreous  Humour. 
At  laft,  the  Extremities  of  its  Ciliary  ProceiTes  divide  into 
a ft  ill  greater  Number  of  Parts  or  Fibres,  refembling  the 
fmall  Branches  of  Nerves  in  other  places  of  the  Body,  which 
are  clofely  connected  to  the  Fore  Part  of  the  Capfule  of 
the  Lens,  about  One-twentieth  of  an  Inch  diftant  from  its 
Outer  Edge,  or  Place  where  the  Anterior  and  Pofierior 
Plano-convex  Lenfes  which  form  it,  are  joined  together. 
After  which,  thefe  Fibres  either  terminate,  or  become  fud- 
denly  fo  pellucid,  that  it  is  impoffible  to  trace  them  farther  ; 
and  it  is  furely  highly  improbable  that  they  form  an  Exter- 
nal Coat  to  the  Capfule  of  the  Lens,  as  Winslow,  Ferrein, 
and  Haller,  fuppofed,  or  that  their  Continuation  on  it  af- 
fifis  in  Villon,  as  the  Rays  of  Light  are  not  fo  fully  col- 
lected upon  the  Capfule  of  the  Lens  as  to  form  a difiinCt 
Picture,  and  we  farther  obferve,  that  when  a CataraCt  is 
very  opake,  the  Light  which  falls  on  the  Capfule  of  the 
Lens  gives  no  diltinct  idea  of  objects. 

The  Retina,  at  its  connection  with  the  Vitreous  Humour 
and  Cryftalline,  is  remarkably  Tougher  than  it  is  in  any  other 
part ; or  it  feems  to  adhere  there,  to  the  Anterior  Layer  of 

the 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


99 


the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  by  Cellular  Threads, 
or  perhaps  by  the  Pia  Mater,  which,  as  I have  elfewhere  en- 
deavoured to  prove,  accompanies  the  Nerves  in  their  whole 
progrefs. 

In  the  feveral  Figures  of  Table  Firfl,  and  Table  Firft 
the  Courfe  and  Termination  of  the  Retina  are  accurately 
reprefented  ; and  the  Reader  may  now  confult  the  Expla- 
nation given  of  thefe  Tables. 

In  confequence  of  the  Termination  of  the  Retina  being" 
extended  to  the  Cryfcalline  Lens,  it  is  evident,  that,  in 
Couching,  the  Surgeon  mult,  before  he  reaches  the  Lens, 
wound  the  Retina  with  his  Needle  ; and  if  he  afterwards 
deprelfes  the  Capfule  along  with  the  Body  of  the  Lens,  or 
if  a Needle  is  palled  around  the  Lens  in  order  to  detach  it 
from  the  neighbouring  parts,  as  has  been  advifed  f,  the 
Anterior  Edge  of  the  Retina  mult  be  lacerated,  and  very 
much  injured. 


As 


f Mr.  da  Wenzel  junior,  on  the  Cataraft,  Sect.  xvi. 


ICO 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


As  the  Rays  of  Light  cannot  be  diredtly  colledted,  fo  as 
to  form  a diftindt  Pidture  on  that  part  of  the  Retina  which 
lines  the  Ciliary  Circle  and  Ciliary  ProcefTes,  there  is  per- 
haps reafon  to  fiifpedt,  that  the  Light  which  is  refledted 
from  the  Pidture  formed  at  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye,  does  not 
aflift  Vifion,  by  giving  a Second  Stroke  to  that  part  of  the 
Retina  on  which  the  diftindt  Pidture  is  formed, — which  feems 
to  be  the  idea  of  Authors  ; for  fuch  a Second  and  Pofterior 
Stroke  would  have  nearly  or  exadtly  the  fame  effedt  as  the 
Firft  : But  rather,  that  we  receive,  on  the  Anterior  Part  of 
the  Retina,  lining  the  Ciliary  Circle  and  Roots  of  the 
Ciliary  ProcefTes,  a Second  and  very  different  kind  of  Im- 
pulfe,  by  the  Light  refledted  from  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye 
to  this  part,  by  which  we  fee  and  judge  better  of  the 
objedt. 

This  fuppofition  feems  to  be  ftrongly  fupported  by  the 
general  obfervation,  that  the  Paint  lining  the  Choroid  Coat 
at  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye,  which  has  been  called  Tapetum , 
is  remarkably  Bright,  and  fit  for  the  Refledlion  of  Light  in 
thofe  Animals  which  feek  their  food  in  the  Night-time,  when 
fuch  an  aid  is  evidently  molt  necefiary. 


The 


OF  THE  OPTIC  NERVES  AND  RETINA. 


IOI 


The  Analogy  of  the  Cochlea  of  the  Ear,  which  receives 
One  Impulfe  through  the  Chain  of  Bones  connedted  to  the 
Membrane  of  the  Oval  Hole,  and  Another  by  the  Membrane 
of  the  Foramen  Rotundum,  fupports  this  Opinion. 


N 


CHAP, 


CHAP.  IV. 


Of  the  Choroid  Coat  and  Ciliary  Procefles. 

TN  Man,  and,  fo  far  as  I have  obferved,  in  all  the  Genera  of 
the  Mammalia,  Birds,  Amphibia,  and  Fifties,  the  Choroid 
Coat  and  Ciliary  Procefles  conflft  of  a Vafcular  Coat  lined  with 
Paint  : But,  in  one  Species , the  White  Rabbit,  I have  found, 

that  the  Paint  is  wanting  *,  and  the  fame  thing  is  true  of 
their  Iris  ; and  hence  their  Eyes  appear  Red  ; becaufe  the 
Blood  circulating  in  the  Vafcular  Part  of  the  Choroid,  is  feen 
through  the  Humours.  It  is  probable,  that  in  other  Species 
or  Varieties  of  Animals  in  which  the  Eyes  appear  very  Red3 
a flmilar  Defed  of  the  Paint  will  be  difcovered, 

N 2 I 


* Book  on  Filhes,  Chap.  xii. 


104 


OF  THE  CHOROID  COAT 


I have  already  obferved,  that  the  Colour  of  the  Paint  is 
Brighteft,  and  moft  fit  to  refled  Light,  in  thofe  Animals 
which  feek  their  food  in  the  Night-time  : But,  in  all  Ani- 

mals which  have  the  Paint,  it  is  found  to  be  Black  where 
it  lines  the  Ciliary  Circle  and  Proceffes,  or  where  it  covers 
the  Anterior  Part  and  Termination  of  the  Retina;  in  order, 
I fuppofe,  to  fuffocate  the  Rays  of  Light  which  are  refleded 
from  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye  upon  this  part  of  the  Retina  : 
And  this  feems  likewife  to  confirm  what  I have  alleged, 
that  no  advantage  in  Vifion  is  to  be  derived  from  Light 
ftriking  firft  the  Inner- fide,  and  then  being  refleded  upon 
the  Outer-fide  of  the  fame  part  of  the  Retina. 

When  the  Paint  is  carefully  wafhed  off  from  the  Inner- 
lide  of  the  Choroid  Coat,  we  fee  evidently,  that  the  Ciliary 
Precedes  are  formed  by  the  Continuation  of  the  Choroid 
Coat,  folded  feventy  or  eighty  times,  fo  as  to  occupy  a 
fmaller  Circle. 

The  Ciliary  Circle,  and  Roots  of  the  Ciliary  Procefles, 
are  firmly  glued  to  the  Anterior  Part  of  the  Retina,  almoft 
as  far  as  to  its  Termination,  or  Infertion  in  the  Outer  Edge 
of  the  Lens  : But  the  Points  or  Terminations  of  the  Ciliary 

Proceffes  float  loofe  in  the  Pofterior  Chamber  of  the  Aqueous 

Humour, 


*» 


AND  CILIARY  PROCESSES. 


105 


Humour,  and  have  no  diredl  Connexion  with  the  Lens, 
Zinn,  who  obferved  that  the  Terminations  of  the  Ciliary 
Procedes  were  not  connected  with  the  Lens  concluded 
therefore,  that  the  Inner  Parts  of  the  Ciliary  Precedes  were 
inferred  into  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour  f : But 

I have  already  obferved,  that  the  Anterior  Part  of  the  Retina 
reaches  to  the  Edge  of  the  Lens,  or  intervenes  between  the 
Ciliary  Procedes  and  Vitreous  Humour. 

It  appears  therefore,  That  the  Ciliary  Precedes  do  not 
form  a complete  Septum  between  the  Aqueous  and  Vitreous 
Humours  ; and,  That  the  Capfule  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens  is 
not  fupported  in  its  place  by  the  Terminations  of  the  Ciliary 
Procedes  of  the  Choroid  Coat  in  it  ; but  that  it  owes  its 
Support  to  the  intimate  Union  of  its  Poderior  Part  with  the 
Poderior  Layer  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  and 

to 


* See  Zinn,  Chap.  ii.  p.  66.  “ Ipfa  tamen  ilia  extrema  libera,  ad  Lentem 

“ non  folum  pertingant,  fed  etiam  ultra  ejus  Circulum  maximum  progrelTa,  See. 
“ fine  pendulo  libero,  &.c.  terminantur.” 

t Zinn,  Chap,  ii,  p.  78,  “ Vitreo  ardlilTime  funt  junfti.” 


106  OF  THE  CHOROID  COAT,  &c. 

to  the  Infertion  of  the  Anterior  Layer  of  the  Capfule  of  the 
Vitreous  Humour  and  Retina  into  it,  near  to  its  Circum- 
ference. 

Whilft  the  Retina,  by  the  Toughnefs  of  its  Pia  Mater, 
gives  more  additional  Support  to  the  Lens  than  we  might 
be  apt  to  fuppofe  from  its  general  Tendernefs  ; it  is  itfelf 
fupported  in  its  place,  befides  ferving  the  ufe  before  men- 
tioned, of  receiving  Imprellions  by  the  Light  refleded  from 
the  Bottom  of  the  Eye. 

In  the  feveral  Figures  of  Table  Firffc,  and  Table  Firft 
tliefe  Parts  are  delineated  j and  to  the  Explanation  of  them 
I lhall  refer  the  Reader. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  V. 


Of  the  Iris. 


SECT.  I. 

TN  the  Book  I publilhed  on  Fifties  I Bated  the  feveral 
circumftances  which  prove,  beyond  doubt,  that  the  Veflels 
of  the  Iris  are  not  Colourlefs,  as  Ruysch,  Vieussens,  Fer- 
rein,  Dr  Haller,  Zinn,  and  others,  following  them  f , have 

taught  5 


* Chap.  xi. 

f Ruysch,  Ep.  xiii. — Vieussens,  Tr.  de  Lin.  p.  an. — Ferrein,  Mem.  de 
l’Acad.  (1739).  — Haller,  El.  Phjf.  Lib.  xvi.  Se£t.  ii.  § xxxiii.  p.435.  “ Ex 
“ eo  porro  Circulo  numerofa  Vafcula  in  Uveam  veniunt,  in  variis  Animalibus, 


“ et 


io8 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


taught  , but  that,  on  the  contrary,  they  are  Large,  Red, 
Numerous,  and  circulate  an  extraordinary  quantity  of  Red 
Blood. 

Since  that  time,  I have  obferved,  in  one  cafe,  a White 
Speck  on  the  Iris,  produced  by  Inflammation,  on  the  Sur- 
face of  which  I could  fee  diflindly  Veflels  filled  with  Red 
Blood. 

In  three  other  cafes,  I have  obferved  a very  remarkable 
appearance,  which,  fo  far  as  I know,  has  efcaped  the  obfer- 
vation  of  Oculifts. 

In  two  of  thefe  cafes,  where  the  Eyes  had  been  long  in- 
flamed, a Network  of  Filaments  palled  from  one  fi.de  of  the 
Iris,  acrofs  the  Pupil,  to  the  other  fide  of  it,  covered  with 
Paint  of  the  fame  colour  with  that  of  the  Iris. 

In 


“ et  imprimis  in  Pifcibus,  Sanguine  plena,  in  Homine  pellucida.” — Zinn  de  Oculo, 
Cap.  ii.  p.  92.  Not.  f.  “ Ut  inde  elici  pofle  videatur  in  Homine  vivo,  VaCcula 
“ liquorem  fanguine  tenuiorem  et  decolorem  vekere.” 


OF  THE  IRIS, 


109 

In  the  third  cafe,  of  a Perfon  who  had  had  a White  Ca- 
taract in  one  of  his  Eyes  for  upwards  of  Twenty  Years,  a 
Network  of  Veflels,  covered  with  Paint  darker  than  that  of 
the  Iris,  was  extended  from  the  Iris  upon  the  Surface  of  the 
CataraCt. 

I pointed  out  thefe  appearances,  in  one  of  the  cafes,  to 
Mr  Anderson,  Surgeon  in  Leith,  and,  in  another,  to  Mr 
Law,  Surgeon  in  Edinburgh,  who  were  attending  the  Patients 
along  with  me. 


SECT.  II. 

The  Nerves  of  the  Iris  are  fo  numerous,  that,  proportioned 
to  its  Weight,  no  part  of  the  Human  Body  is  perhaps  fo  plen- 
tifully fupplied  with  them. 


O 


SECT. 


no 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


SECT.  III. 

But,  what  account  are  we  to  give  of  its  Mufcular  Fibres  > 
or  of  thofe  Fibres  by  means  of  which  its  motions  are  per- 
formed ? 

When  we  look  into  the  Works  of  Dr  Haller,  we  find 
this  celebrated  Author,  after  quoting  the  accounts  given  by 
others,  affirming,  in  the  moft  pointed  manner, ’ That,  although 
he  examined  the  Iris  of  the  Ox  with  the  Microfcope,  he 
could  not  perceive  in  it  any  Circular  Fibres : And  his  Pupil 

and  Succeffor  (Dr  Wrisberg)  affirms  the  fame 

Confiding 


* Haller.  El.  Pliyf.  Lib.  xvi.  Se£t.  n.  p.  371.  “ Ex  hypothefi,  plurimi 

44  Scriptores  Fibras  effe,  in  circulum  circumdu&as.  Verum  eas  iaepe,  et  myopibus 
44  meis,  caetera  bonis,  oculis,  et  lentibus  vitreis,  vehementer  augentibus,  adjutis 
54  cum  quaererem,  nunquam  reperi  ullas.” — p.  378.  44  Circulus  in  Uvea  conftri&or 

14  nullus  eft.”— —Haller.  Pr.  Lin.  Phyf.  § dxii.  44  Qrbiculares  Fibras,  con- 

u 


centricas 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


in 


Confiding  in  the  accuracy  of  Dr  Hal£er,  I,  for  many 
years,  examined  this  organ  with  lefs  attention  than,  probably, 
I fhould  otherwife  have  done.  But  having,  at  laft,  examined 
carefully  the  Iris  of  an  Ox,  after  wafhing  off  the  Paint,  I 
was  not  more  pleafed  than  furprifed,  to  find,  on  its  Anterior 
Part,  a broad  flat  oval  Organ,  with  Fibres  of  a dark  reddifh 
Colour,  difpofed  in  nearly  the  fame  manner  as  thofe  of  the 
Orbicularis  Palpebrarum  are. 

Its  appearance  is,  in  all  refpe&s,  fo  evidently  Mufcular, 
that  I think  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  its  being  the  iphinfler 
of  the  Pupil  : And  I can  only  account  for  its  having  efca- 

O 2 ped 


“ centricas  Pupillae,  neque  Oculus,  neque  Microfcopium,  ne  in  Bove  quidem,  mihi 
“ demonftravit.” 

In  a tranflation  of  Notes  by  Dr  Wrisberg  on  Haller’s  Primae  Lineae,  the 
Dodtor  writes  as  follows  : “ Befides  anatomical  proofs,  by  which  it  is  undoubted- 

“ ly  certain,  that  the  Iris  has  no  real  Mufcular  Fibres,  and  that  the  contradtion  and 
“ dilatation  of  the  Pupil  is  rather  to  be  afcribed  to  the  Veffels  than  to  Mufcles.” 

Zinn  de  Oculo,  Cap.  ii.  Seel.  iii.  § iv.  p.  91.  “ Dubius  certe  haereo,  annoa 

“ Fabrica  Mufculofa  in  Iride  agnofeenda  efie  videtur.’J 


212 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


ped  the  obfervation  of  Dr  Haller  and  Dr  Wrisberg,  by 
fuppofing,  that  they  had  not  waihed  off  the  Black  Paint, 
which  covers  and  conceals  it,  as  well  as  the  Red  Veffels  of 
the  Iris. 

On  the  Inner  and  Anterior  Part  of  the  Iris,  and  on  the 
whole  of  its  Pofterior  Part,  the  Fibres  are  difpofed  like  Ra- 
dii and,  if  they  are  Mufcular,  they  are  well  fituated  for 
dilating  the  Pupil.  But  thefe  have  many  more  Blood-veflels 
in  their  compolition,  and  have  much  lefs  the  appearance  of 
Mufcular  Fibres,  than  the  oval  fibrous  Organ  I have  defcri- 
bed  on  the  Forepart  of  the  Iris. 

In  Table  II.  Fig.  i.  and  2.  thefe  Parts  are  elegantly  and 
accurately  reprefented,  from  Drawings  made  of  them,  at  my 
requeff,  by  Mr  Fyfe. 

My  fuccefs  in  the  Ox  naturally  prompted  me  to  examine 
the  Human  Iris  with  greater  attention  than  I had  formerly 
bellowed  on  it  ; and  in  this  I found,  with  equal  fatisfadion, 
a very  diftind  Sphinder  Mufcle  ; but  fomewhat  differently 
difpofed  ; for  in  Man  it  occupies  the  Innermoft  Part  of  the 
Iris,  or  forms  a Ring  immediately  furrounding  the  Pupil, 
which  is  equally  well  feen  on  its  Fore  and  Back  Parts,  and 

makes 


\ 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


i*3 

makes  about  One-Fifth  Part  of  the  Breadth  of  the  Iris. 
Between  the  Sphin&er  and  Root  of  the  Iris,  the  Space  is 
filled  up  with  Vehels  and  Radiated  Fibres. 

See  Table  III.  and  its  Explanation. 

Dr  Zinn,  Dr  Haller,  and  Dr  Wrisberg  particularly, 
the  two  latter,  have  doubted  of,  or  denied,  the  Mufcular,  or, 
as  they  fpeak,  Irritable  nature  of  the  Iris  ; becaufe  the  Con- 
traction of  the  Pupil  is  not  occasioned  by  Strong  Light  fall- 
ing upon  it. 

But 


* Zinn  de  Ocufo,  Cap.  ii.  Sect.  in.  § iv.  p.  95. 

Haller.  El.  Phyf.  Lib.  xvi.  Se6t.il.  p.371.  u Nam,  per  experiments  folicite 
ie  capta,  Iris  in  vivo  animate  Irritabilitate  omni  deftituitur,  ipfisque  a lucis  radiis, . 
“ per  conum  chartaceam  in  folam  Iridem  determinatis,  non  movetur ; fed  Muf- 
“ culo  proprium  eft,  effe  irritabilem.’* 

Wrisberg,  in  a Note  on  Haller,  Pr.  Lin.  Phyf.  § dxiii.  “ My  own  ex- 
“ periments  have  convinced  me,  that  the  Iris  does  not  belong  to  the  parts  en~ 
u dowed  with  regular  Irritability;  for  the  folar.  light  dire&ed  upon  the  Iris  re- 
“ mains  without  any  fuch  effetV5 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


l.i  4 

But  their  inference  is  by  no  means  to  be  admitted. 

Becaufe,  without  alleging  that  its  being  roufed  into  adtion 
by  the  irritation  of  the  Retina,  is  fcarcely  to  be  ex- 
plained, but  on  the  fuppofition  that  the  Living  Princi- 
ple is  firft  excited,  and  a Mufcular  Adtion  in  confequence 
produced  ; I would  obferve,  that  the  Colour  or  Paint  upon 
the  Iris,  which  prevents  the  Light  from  getting  to  the  Bot- 
tom of  the  Eye  except  through  the  Pupil,  muft,  like  a Cuti- 
cula,  prevent  the  Light  from  irritating  the  Iris,  unlefs  we 
fuppofe  it  to  be  concentrated  in  a very  great  degree. 

In  the  next  place,  we  are  to  confider,  that,  in  the  com- 
mon offices  of  life,  Light  is  colledted  into  a Focus,  or  fo 
concentrated,  that  it  may  prove  hurtful  to  the  Retina  alone ; 
and  therefore  Nature  has,  in  general,  regulated  the  adtion  of 
the  Iris,  according  to  the  Quantity  of  the  Light  which  falls 
upon  the  Retina. 

I would  further  obferve,  that  various  other  Mufcles  are 
thrown  into  a more  fudden  and  violent  adlion,  by  Stimuli 
applied  to  diffant  organs,  than  if  the  fame  Stimuli  had  been 
diredtly  applied  to  thofe  Mufcles.  Thus,  if  a Drop  of  Cold 
Water,  or  even  a Drop  of  Warm  Saliva,  falls  into  the  Glot- 
tis, 


OF  THE  IRIS. 


tis,  the  very  diftant  Abdominal  Mufcles  are  fuddenly  con- 
vulfed.  I furely  need  not  fay,  that  the  Warm  Saliva,  di- 
rectly applied  to  thofe  Mufcles,  laid  bare  by  diffeCtion,  would 
produce  no  fuch  effeCt. 

In  the  laft  place,  I have,  many  years  ago,  obferved  in  the 
Parrot,  that  the  Pupil  is,  alternately,  greatly  contracted  and 
dilated,  whilft  the  Eye  is  expofed  to  the  fame  degree  of 
faint  Light  * ; which  is  quite  inconiiltent  with  the  idea, 
that  the  aCtion  of  the  Iris  is  produced  by  the  foie  and  di- 
rect effeCt  of  Stimuli  applied  to  it. 

CHAP. 


See  Dr  Porterfield’s  Book  on  the  Eyes,  Vol.  ii.  Chap.  v.  p.  151. 


CHAP.  VI 


Of  the  Veflels  of  the  Cornea. 


SECT.  i. 

TN  the  Book  which  I publiflied  on  the  Strudure  and  Phy~- 
“*■  flology  of  Fifli.es,  in  the  year  1785,  I obferved,  (Ch.  XL) 
that  the  Veflels  containing  Red  Blood,  which  are  been  upon 
the  Cornea  after  an  Inflammation  of  it,  are  not  its  original 
Veflels  dilated,  but  are  newly-formed  Veflels,  rooted  in  the 
Tunica  Adnata,  and  extended,  from  it,  oyer  the  External 
Surface  of  the  Cornea  } and  hence,  that  Surgeons  might  per- 
ceive the  propriety  of  attempting  to  remove  thefe,  and  the 
Specks  produced  by  them,  by  Chirurgical  means  and  Exter- 
nal applications. 


P 


I would 


z 1 8 


OF  THE  VESSELS  OF  THE  CORNEA. 


I would  now  obferve,  that,  in  every  cafe  I have  examined 
fince  that  time,  I have  found  a confirmation  of  the  truth  of 
the  above  alTertiom 


SECT.  II. 

It  may  be  worth  while  to  add,  that,  on  examining  an 
Opake  Circle,  which,  in  many  very  old  Perfons,  encroaches 
upon  the  Cornea,  I have  found  that  Circle  full  of  very  mi- 
nute Veifels,  rooted  likewife  in  the  Adnata,  and  extended  on 
the  External  Surface  of  the  Cornea,  without  entering  between 
its  Layers. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  VII. 


Of  certain  Laws  by  which  we  judge  of 
the  Pofition  and  Distance  of  Objects, 
and  by  which  we  regulate  the  Motions 
of  the  Eyes. 


SECT.  I. 

A LT  HOUGH  the  whole  PiUure  of  an  Object  formed 
on  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye  be  inverted,  we  form  a juft 
judgment  of  the  Pofition  of  its  Parts  becaufe  we  are  taught 
by  Iiiftindt,  that  each  Pencil  of  Rays  which  firikes  the  Re- 
tina mutt  have  come  from  the  oppofite  fide.  Juft  as,  when 
our  Hand  is  held  fupine  in  the  horizontal  pofture,  if  the 

P Back 


V 


i2o  LAWS  BY  WHICH  WE  JUDGE  OF  THE 

Back  of  it  be  ftruck,  we  fuppofe  the  Broke  to  have  come 
from  Below  j and,  if  the  Palm,  from  Above. 

I apprehend  we  are  further  taught  by  Inftindt,  that  the 
Tight  has  palled  through  the  Pupil,  and  that  we  therefore 
form  a more  correct  idea  of  the  Polition  of  the  Objetfl, 
than  when,  with  Authors  *,  we  imagine,  that  the  Light  is 
traced  perpendicularly  from  the  Place  of  the  Pi&ure. 


SECT.  II. 

As  we  derive  many  advantages  from  directing  the  Axes 
of  the  Two  Eyes  to  the  fame  point,  the  fuppoftion  made  by 
Authors,  that  this  Direction  is  not  given  by  Inflinct,  but 

proceeds 


* Dr  Porterfield  and  Dr  Reid. See  Dr  Reid’s  Inquiry  into  the  Human 

Mind,  On  Seeing,  Chap.  vi.  Se£t.  xii.  p.  261.  “A  vifible  object  appears  in  the 
“ direction  of  a right  line,  j perpendicular  to  the  retina  at  that  point  where  its 
“ image  is  painted.” 


POSITION  AND  DISTANCE  OF  OBJECTS. 


121 


proceeds  from  Cuftom  and  Habit  *,  mud,  at  firft  fight,  ap- 
pear extremely  improbable  ; and  the  more  I have  attended 
to  the  Motions  of  the  Eyes,  not  only  in  Infants,  but  in  other 
very  young  Animals,  the  more  I am  convinced  that  the  Uni- 
form Motion  of  the  Eyes,  and  the^  accurate  Direction  of  Both 
to  One  Point,  is  Original. 

We  may  obferve  many  other  Complex  Actions,  Refpiration, 
Sucking,  Deglutition,  performed  without  Experience  : Why 

then  doubt  that  the  Uniform  Motion  of  the  Eyes  is  regulated 
by  a limilar  Law  ? 

That,  by  Habit,  we  are  lefs  able  to  move  the  Eyes  in 
different  Diredions  in  the  advanced  than  in  the  early  period 
of  life,  is  at  the  fame  time  true. 

SEC  1’. 


* Dr  Porterfield  on  the  Eye,  Vol.  I.  Book  ii.  Chap.  v.  p.  23.  “ The  true 
“ caufe  of  this  uniform  motion  depends  on  Cuftom  and  Habit.” 

Dr  Reid,  p.  240.  “ Nature  hath  very  wifely  left  us  the  power  of  varying 
“ the  parallelifm  of  our  Eyes  a little,  fo  that  we  can  direft  them  to  the  fame 
“ point,  whether  remote  or  near.  This  no  doubt  is  learned  by  Cuftom.” 


1 22 


LAWS  BY  WHICH  WE  JUDGE  OF  THE 


SECT.  III. 

The  Diredion  of  the  Optic  Axes  furnifhes,  no  doubt,  an- 
auxiliary  means  by  which  we  judge  of  the  Didances  of  Ob- 
jects ; but  drange  overfights  have  been  committed  by  Au- 
thors on  this  fubjed,  and  particularly  by  Dr  Porterfield, 
who  fuppofes  effects  to  proceed  folely  from  this  caufe,  which 
evidently  flow  from  others. 

Thus,  he  tells  us,  that  when  a Perion  has  had  the  mis- 
fortune of  lofing  one  of  his  Eyes,  or  even  if  a Perfon 
fhuts  one  of  his  Eyes,  he  cannot  readily  fill  out  a difli 
of  tea,  or  fnuff  a candle,  becaufe  he  wants  the  concurrence 
of  the  Optic  Axes  ; without  confidering,  that  the  degree 
of  adion  or  draining  of  the  Mufcles  neceflary  to  dired 
the  Axis  of  One  Eye  to  the  objed,  would  have  nearly  the 
fame  elfed  on  tiie  Mind  as  the  Diredion  of  Both  Axes  to 
the  fame  point.  Befides,  he  forgets,  that  the  Axis  of  the 
Eye  which  is  fliut,  and  even  that  of  the  blind  Eye,  for  a 
long  time  at  lead,  follows  the  motion  of  the  other. 


In 


POSITION  AND  DISTANCE  OF  OBJECTS. 


123 


In  like  manner,  in  his  principal  experiment  by  which  he 
proves  that  the  Eyes  accommodate  themfelves  to  the  Di fian- 
ces of  Objeds,  he  obferves,  that  if  we  fhut  the  Left  Eye, 
and,  with  the  Right  Eye,  view  a Luminous  Point  through 
two  fmall  Holes  in  a Card,  this  Point  will  appear  Single  at 
a certain  diftance  to  which  the  Eye  is  accommodated,  but 
will  appear  Double  in  all  other  fituations  ; becaufe  the  Rays 
of  Light  which  pafs  through  fmall  Holes,  form  fuch  diftinCt 
Pictures,  that  the  Eye  is  not  folicited  to  alter  its  Conform- 
ation to  the  Diftance.  And  he  proves  that  the  above  is  a 
juft  account,  by  next  obferving,  that  if  the  Left  Eye  is  open- 
ed, and  Both  Eyes  directed  to  the  Luminous  Point,  the  Dou- 
ble appearance  of  it  inftantly  vanifties.  But,  in  attempting 
to  explain  the  Caufes  which  prompt  the  Mind  to  ad,  he  fup- 
pofes,  that  the  Two  Optic  Axes  being  now  direded  to  the 
fame  Point,  we  are  enabled  to  take  the  Angle,  and  fo  meafure 
the  Diftance  ; not  refleding,  that  the  Axis  of  the  Left  Eye, 
whilft  it  was  Shut,  was  guided  by  the  Diredion  of  the  Open 
Eye,  or  had  had  the  fame  Diredion  when  it  was  Shut,  as 
when  it  was  Opened. 

Hence  Dr  Porterfield,  though  he  proves,  by  this  expe- 
riment, that  the  Eye  alters  its  Conformation,  has  not  point- 
ed 


124 


LAWS  BY  WHICH  WE  JUDGE,  &c. 


ed  out  the  true  Means  by  which  it  judges  of  the  Diftance, 
and  is  therefore  folicited  to  aft. 

Thefe,  I apprehend,  in  this  cafe,  depend  on  the  clearer 
view  which  the  Two  Eyes  receive,  not  only  of  the  Lumi- 
nous Point,  but  of  the  relative  Situation  of  the  feveral  Ob- 
jects which  are  nearer  to  or  farther  from  us  than  it ; by 
means  of  which  the  Mind  judges  more  accurately  of  the 
Diftance,  and  therefore  accommodates  the  Eye  to  it. 


G H A P. 


CHAP.  VIIL 


Of  the  Means  by  which  we  accommodate 
the  Eye  to  the  Diftances  of  Objects. 

HjmHAT  the  Human  Eye  pofiefles  the  power  of  accommo- 
A dating  itfelf  to  the  Diftances  of  Objects,  feems  beyond 
a doubt  * : And,  I think,  I can  prove,  that  this  power  is 

not  reftri&ed  within  the  narrow  limit  of  Twenty-feven  In- 
ches, as  Dr  Porterfield  contends  j for  I find,  that  when 
I place  two  minute  Obje&s  in  nearly  the  fame  line,  the 
neareft  of  them  at  the  diftance  of  Three  Feet,  and  the  other 
at  double  or  treble  that  diftance,  on  viewing  them  alternate- 
ly with  one  Eye,  they  become  alternately  confufed  and 
diftinct. 


cl 


But 


•*  See  Dr  Porterfield  on  the  Eyes. 


126 


MEANS  BY  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE 


But,  to  afcertain  the  Means  by  which  the  Eye  accommo- 
dates itfelf  to  the  Diftances  of  ObjeCts,  is  a matter  of  much 
difficulty. 

The  following  are  the  chief  Means  enumerated  ; on  each 
of  which  I fhall  make  a few  Remarks.  And  I ffiall  then 
point  out  an  Additional  Means,  which  has  efcaped  the  ob- 
fervation  of  Authors. 


SECT.  I. 

It  has  been  fuppofed,  that  the  Fibres  which  enter  into  the 
compofition  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens  are  Mufcular,  and  that, 
by  their  Contraction,  they  render  the  Lens  more  Convex, 
and  therefore  adapt  the  Eye  to  near  ObjeCts.  But  to  this 
opinion  I have,  in  the  Firft  Chapter  of  this  Paper,  propofed 
Objections,  to  which  I ffiall  refer  the  Reader. 


SECT. 


THE  EYE  TO  THE  DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS,  127 


SECT.  II. 

The  Ciliary  Procefles  have  been  fuppofed  to  be  chief 
agents.  But,  without  Bating,  that  Mufcular  Fibres  are  not 
to  be  feen  in  thefe  Procefles  *,  or  the  improbability  that  the 
Choroid  Coat,  of  which  they  are  the  Continuation,  in  the 
form  of  Folds  or  Doublings,  is  Mufcular,  as  its  general  ac- 
tion would  be  ufelefs  and  even  injurious  to  the  Retina  ; and 
without  repeating  the  argument,  that  the  Eye  feems  to  ac- 
commodate itfelf  after  the  Extraction  of  the  Lens  ; — I would 
remind  the  Reader,  that  their  Extremities  float  loofe  in  the 
x^queous  Humour,  and  that  their  Inner-part  is  connected  to 
the  Lens  by  the  medium  of  the  Retina  : Nor  is  their  direc- 
tion fuch,  that  they  can  be  fuppofed  capable  of  pulling  the 
Lens  forwards,  by  pulling  the  Retina  : Or,  if  we  were  to 

fiippofe  them  to  be  Mufcular,  and  to  a<5t  with  confiderable 
force,  they  would  render  the  Lens  flatter,  by  pulling  its 

0.2  Circular 


* Zinn,  Cap.  ii.  p.  70.  “ Neque  unquam  -Microfcopio  imicam  Fibram  Miifcu- 

“ larein  reperiri  potm.” 


128 


MEANS  BY'  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE 


Circular  Edge  outwards,  and  would  therefore  have  the  effed, 
contrary  to  what  is  fuppofed,  of  rendering  the  Eye  lefs  fit 
for  viewing  near  objeds. 


SECT.  III. 

The  Iris,  by  lellening  the  Pupil,  and  cutting  off  the  moil 
diverging  rays  of  light,  when  we  are  viewing  near  objeds, 
unquedionably  makes  the  Pidure  on  the  Retina  more  diflind, 
and  therefore  renders  the  Objed  more  diftind. 


SECT.  IV. 

Some,  as  Jurin,  have  thought,  that  the  Iris  might,  by  its 
Contradion,  have  the  effed  of  drawing  the  Root  of  the  Cor- 
nea inwards  ; and,  by  this  means,  render  the.  Cornea  more 
Convex  : And  the  Difpolition  of  the  Sphinder  Mufcle  of 

the  Iris,  efpecially  in  the  Ox,  may  feem  to  fupport  this 
opinion. 


But 


THE  EYE  TO  THE  DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS. 


129 


But  I muft  obferve,  That  the  Iris  is  not  Rooted  in  the 
Cornea,  as  thofe  who  maintain  this  opinion  fuppofe,  but  in 
the  Sclerotic  Coat,  which  in  Man  is  thicker  and  refills  more 
than  the  Cornea,  and  in  many  other  Animals  is  remarkably 
hard  and  inflexible.  Befides  this,  I have  fhewn,  that,  in 
Man,  the  Sphincter  Mufcle  of  the  Iris  is  placed  on  the  In- 
ner Edge  of  the  Iris,  with  the  interpofition  of  the  Radiated 
Vafcular  Subfiance  between  it  and  the  Sclerotic  ; fo  that  it 
cannot  directly  affect  the  Sclerotic  and  Cornea. 

To  thefe  we  may  add,  that,  in  a clear  light,  when  the 
Iris  is  flrongly  contracted,  we  fee  remote  objects  diflinclly  : 
Whereas,  if  the  flrong  contraction  of  the  Iris  which  then 
takes  place,  rendered  the  Cornea  more  Convex,  and  thereby 
fitted  the  Eye  for  near  objects,  thofe  fhould  appear  con^ 
fufed. 


SECT.  Vo 

The  External  Mufcles,  and  particularly  the  Recti,  have, 
by  many,  been  thought  to  be  well  adapted  for  elongating 
the  Axis  of  the  Eye  and  a late  Writer  alleges,  that  the 

Recti. 


MEANS  BY  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE 


W> 

Redi  terminate  partly  in  the  External  Layer  of  the  Cornea, 
and  therefore  are  better  fuited,  than  was  imagined,  for  fuch 
a purpofe.  But  here  I would  obferve,  in  the  firfb  place, 
That,  on  re-examining  this  point  of  Anatomy  with  attention, 
I have  found  all  the  Tendinous  Fibres  of  the  Redi  firmly 
attached  to  the  Sclerotic,  at  the  diflance  of  a quarter  of  an 
inch  from  the  Edge  of  the  Cornea,  and  no  appearance  that 
any  part  of  them,  or  that  any  Membrane  produced  by  them, 
is  continued  over  the  Cornea*. 


In 


'*  By  experiment  on  the  Human  Eye,  I found,  that  the  Weight  of  Fifty-four 
Ounces  tore  one  of  the  Re£H  Mufcles  ; but  that  it  required  the  Weight  of  a Hun- 
dred Ounces  to  tear  its  Tendon  from  the  Sclerotic  Coat,  and  when  the  Tendon 
quitted  the  Sclerotic,  there  was  no  appearance  feen  of  its  Fibres  palling  forwards 

ever  the  Cornea.  And,  the  generally  very  accurate,  Zinn,  who  had  no  parti- 

■ 

cular  Theory  to  fupport  or  to  refute,  exprefles  hkmfelf  on  this  fubjedt  in  the  fol- 
lowing words : “ Tendines  illorum  Mufculorum  linguli,  etfi  ad  infertionem  la- 

41  tiores  evadunt,  dillinfti  tamen  femper  manent,  et,  ubi  immiffis  in  Scleroticam 
e‘  Fibris,  iili  tarn  intime  jam  affiguntur,  ut  line  manifefta  laceratione  ulterius  dividi 
“ non  pofiint,  fatis  magno  inter  fe  diftant  intervallo,  nec  alibi  fefe  contingunt,  ut, 
“ nunquam  in  unum  jungi,  aut  propriam  tunicam  ccntinuam  conflituere  polTe,  affir- 
u mari  poflit.”  Zinn  de  Oculo,  Cap.  i,  p.  14. 


THE  EYE  TO  THE  DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS. 


131 

In  the  next  place,  if  they  had  terminated  partly  in  the 
External  Layer  of  the  Cornea,  in  fuch  a manner  as  to  af- 
fect it  chiefly,  they  fliould,  by  pulling  the  whole  External 
Layer  of  the  Cornea  backwards,  have  flattened  the  Cornea, 
inftead  of  rendering  it  more  convex. 


SECT.  VI, 

About  fifteen  years  ago,  it  occurred  to  me,  that,  although 

4. 

we  fliould  grant,  to  Dr  Porterfield  and  others,  that  the 
Axis  of  the  Eye  could  not  be  elongated  by  the  Retfli  Muf- 
cles  ; yet,  that  the  Oblique  Mufcles,  which  are  thrown,  in 
oppofite  dire&ions,  around  the  Eyeball,  might  have  this  e fi- 
fe ft.  I have  fince  obferved,  that  Dr  Keil,  Hambergerus* 
and  other  Phyfiologifts,  had  long  ago  entertained  the  fame 
idea  *, 

To 


* Dr  Keil,  Ang.  Chap.  iv.  Se&.  iv.  “ The  Aqueous  Humour,  being  the 
4‘  thinneft  and  molt  liquid,  eafiiy  changes  its  figure,  when  either  the  Ligamentum 

“ Ciliars.. 


132  MEANS  BY  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE 

To  be  better  underflood,  I had  a Preparation  and  Draw- 
ing made  of  the  Oblique  Mufcles  ; from  which  Table  III. 
was  engraved. 


SECT.  VII. 

I shall  conclude,  by  pointing  out  one  other  Means,  that 
had  not  occurred  to  Authors,  which  we  employ  when  we 
view  minute  obje&s  placed  near  to  the  Eyes. 

If  we  attend  to  what  pafles  in  that  cafe,  we  may  be  fen- 
fible  that  we  bring  the  Upper  and  Under  Eyelids  nearer  to 
each  other;  and  then,  by  a confiderable  exertion,  contrad: 
the  parts  about  the  Eyes. 


On 


u Ciliare  contra&s,  or  both  the  Oblique  Mufcles  fqueeze  the  middle  of  the  Bulb  of 
u the  Eye,  to  render  it  oblong,  when  obje&s  are  too  near  us.”  — ■ — - Briggs  et 
Hamberger.  de  Oculo,  p.  180.  propofe  the  fame  opinion. 


THE  EYE  TO  THE  DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS.  133 


On  confidering  this,  it  appeared  to  me  probable,  that  the 
Orbicular  Mufcle  of  the  Eyelids  might,  by  its  preflure  on 
the  Upper  and  Under  Parts  of  the  Cornea,  make  thefe  fome- 
what  Flatter,  and,  of  courfe,  protrude  the  Middle  Part  of 
the  Cornea  between  the  Edges  of  the  Eyelids,  fo  as  to  ren- 
der it  more  Convex  ; at  the  fame  time  increafing  its  di~ 
fiance  from  the  Lens,  and  lengthening  the  Axis  of  the  Eye- 
ball. 

On  putting  this  matter  to  the  tell  of  the  following  Expe- 
riments, the  event  appeared  to  correfpond  exa&ly  with  the 
idea  I had  formed. 


EXPERIMENT  I. 

In  a clofet,  lighted  by  a fingle  window,  I fat  on  a chair, 
with  my  back  to  the  window,^  and  fixed  a Book,  with  Small 
Print,  on  the  oppofite  walk  I then  brought  my  Eyes  fo 
near  to  the  Book,  that  the  Letters  became  indiflindl.  I 
then  made  an  Exertion  to  read,  without  contracting  the  Or- 
bicularis } or,  I opened  the  Eyelids  wide,  by  adling  with, 

O 

the  Attollens  Paipebram  Superiorem  5 or,  I held  the  Upper 

R and. 


1 34- 


MEANS  BY  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE 


and  Under  Eyelids  with  my  fingers  at  a difiance  from  each 
other,  and  then  repeated  my  effort  to  read  the  Book  ; but 
found  I could  not  do  it.  That  is,  my  Eyes  were  fo  near  to 
the  Book,  that,  although  I attempted  to  exert  all  the  means 
before  enumerated,  the  Eyes  were  not  fo  much  altered  in 
their  conformation  a-s  to  render  the  vifion  difiindt.  In  this 
Experiment,  no  part  of  the  Cornea  was  covered  by  the  Eye- 
lids, for  the  Eyelids  were  at  the  difiance  of  Half  an  Inch 
from  each  other. 


EXPERIMENT  II. 

In  this  Experiment,  I kept  my  head  in  the  fame  pofture, 
and  at  the  fame  di fiance  from  the  Book,  as  in  the  former 
Experiment  ; but  I acted  with  the  Orbicularis  Palpebrarum, 
fo  as  to  bring  the  Edges  of  the  Eyelids  within  a Quarter  of 
an  Inch  of  each  other,  and  then  made  an  exertion  to  read, 
and  found  I could  fee  the  Letters  and  Words  diftindly. 


E X- 


THE  EYE  TO  THE  DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS. 


135 


EXPERIMENT  III. 

In  this  Experiment,  I kept  my  head  in  the  fame  pofiure, 
and  at  the  fame  diftance  from  the  Book,  as  in  the  two  for- 
mer Experiments  ; but,  inftead  of  employing  the  Mufcular 
Contraction  of  the  Orbicularis  Palpebrarum,  I brought  the 
Edges  of  the  Upper  and  Under  Eyelids  within  a Quarter  of 
an  Inch  of  each  other,  by  means  of  my  fingers,  and  then 
ftretched  the  Edges  of  the  Eyelids  fo  as  to  make  Prefiure 
on  the  Upper  and  Under  Edges  of  the  Cornea  ; and  found, 
that  the  Letters  then  appeared  difiinCt. 


As,  in  all  thefe  Experiments,  the  Difiance  of  the  Eye 
irom  the  Object,  and  the  Quantity  of  Light,  were  the  fame ; 
as  no  Part  of  the  Pupil  was  covered  by  the  Eyelids,  fo  as 
to  cut  off  the  mod  diverging  Rays  ; as  the  ObjeCt  appear- 
ed confufed  when  the  Orbicularis  was  not  contracted  ; and 
difiinCt  on  its  contracting  j — there  can  be  no  doubt  that 

R 2.  the. 


MEANS  BY  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE 


136 
* 

the  Adtion  of  the  Orbicularis  helps  to  accommodate  the  Eye 
for  feeing  near  Obje&s  more  diflindtly  *. 

SECT. 


* On  the  ift  day  of  May  1794,  Dr  David  Hosack  read  to  the  Royal  Society 
of  London,  Obfervations  on  Vifion,  in  which  (Phil.  Tranf.  1794,  Part  II.  xv, 
p.  222.)  he  writes  as  follows  : “ With  a Speculum,  I made  preflure  on  the  Eye, 

“ while  dire&ing  attention  to  an  Object  twenty  yards  diftant,  and  faw  it  diftindtly : 
“ but,  endeavouring  to  look  beyond  it,  every  thing  appeared  confufed. 

“ I then  increafed  the  Preffure  confiderably,  in  confequence  of  which  I was 
“ enabled  to  fee  objects  di&indtly  at  a much  nearer  than  the  natural  focal  diftance  ; 
“ for  example,  I held  a Book  before  my  Eye  at  the  diftance  of  two  inches.  In 
“ the  natural  ftate  of  the  Eye,  I could  neither  diftinguifh  Lines  nor  Letters  : but, 
“ on  making  Preflure  with  the  Speculum,  I was  enabled  to  diftinguilh  both  Lines 
“ and  Letters  of  the  Book  with  eafe.” 

I find  myfelf,  therefore,  under  the  difagreeable  neceflity  of  adding,  That  I men- 
tioned the  above  Experiments,  in  my  Public  Courfe  of  Lectures,  on  the  27th  day 
of  April  1789: — That  I have  repeated  the  mention  of  them  in  every  Courfe  of 
my  Lectures  fince  that  time  : — That  Dr  Wheaton  Bradish,  in  his  Inaugural 
Differtation  “ De  Vifu,”  publifhed  on  September  12.  1792,  and  which  I did  not 
read  till  it  was  publifhed,  mentions,  in  p.  39.  thefe  opinions,  which  I had  propofed 
in  my  Leftures,  in  the  following  words:  “ Lortge  veto  ante  alias  enitefcit  fenten- 
a tia,  qure  interni  auxilio  cujufvis  fpreto,  Mufculos  quofdam  Oculi  externos,  obliquos 
u nempe,  infuper  et  Orbicularem,  hos  limul  prteftare  effe&us  afleruit.  Tali  mcdo 

“ Oculi 


THE  EYE  TO  THE  DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS.  137 


SECT.  VIIL 

Upon  the  whole  : it  appears  to  me, 

1.  That  the  Iris,  by  leflening  the  Pupil,  and  intercepting 
the  moll  diverging  Rays  of  Light,  renders  the  Pidure  of 
near  Objeds  more  diftind. 

2.  That  the  Redi  Mufcles,  by  their  adion,  lengthen  the 
Axis,  becaufe  they  prefs  chiefly  on  the  Sides  of  the  Eyeball  j 
and,  further,  the  Cornea  is  not  only  more  dilatable  than  the 
Sclerotic  in  general  is,  but  it  will  be  found  that  the  Scle- 
rotic, in  Man  and  other  Animals,  is  thinner  and  more  di- 
latable, in  its  Anterior  Part,  and  in  its  Pofterior  Part  where 
the  Pidure  is  formed,  than  it  is  on  its  Sides. 

3.  That 


“ Oculi  Axin  augeri,  Corneamque  convexam  magis  quam  antea  reddi.” — That  Dr 
David  Hosack  attended  my  Courfe  of  Lectures  the  winter  after  Dr  Bradish 
publithed  his  Inaugural  Differtation,  to  wit,  1792-3,  which  was  finifhed  upwards 
of  a year  before  Dr  Hosack  read  his  Paper  to  the  Royal  Society. 


I3s  MEANS  BY  WHICH  WE  ACCOMMODATE,  &c. 


3.  That  the  two  Oblique  Mufcles  forming  an  Oblique 
Girth  around  the  Eyeball,  between  the  Lens  and  Bottom  of 
the  Eye,  muft,  by  their  Preflure,  increafe  the  Didance  of 
the  Lens  from  the  Retina,  or  increafe  the  Length  of  the 
Pofterior  Part  of  the  Axis  of  the  Eyeball. 

4.  The  Orbicularis  Palpebrarum  renders  the  Fore  and  Mid- 
dle Part  of  the  Cornea,  oppolite  to  the  Pupil,  more  Convex  ^ 
and  increafes  the  Length  of  the  Anterior  Part  of  the  Axis 
of  the  Eyeball.  And  it  is  evident  that  all  thefe  Means  may 
concur  in  forming  perfed  Villon. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  IX. 


Of  the  Lachrymal  Du£ts. 


SECT.  i. 


"^C^ERY  eminent  Authors,  Haller  and  Zinn,  having  Part- 
ed their  doubts  of  the  Exiftence  of  Duds  from  the 
Glandula  Innominata  of  Galen  I was  led  to  examine  the 

fubjed 


* Haller,  in  Pr.  Lin.  Phyf.  Cap.  xviii.  § 498.  “ Lachrymam  partial  ar- 

S(  teriae  conjunctivas  tunicae  exhalant,  partim  creditur  deponere  Glandula,”  &c. 
In  Homine  nondum  fatis  certo,  neque  mihi  unquam  vili  funt  DuCtus.” 


T.  G.  Zinn, 


140 


OF  THE  LACHRYMAL  DUCTS. 


fubjeci  with  accuracy  ; and,  after  finding  one  large  Duct 
from  it  in  Birds,  I difcovered  a number  of  fmall  Duds  from 
it  in  the  Human  Body,  running  nearly  parallel  with  each 
other,  and  terminating  on  the  Inner-fide  of  the  Upper  Eye- 
lid, not  far  from  the  External  Canthus  of  the  Eye*. 

After  introducing  Briftles  into  fome  of  them,  1 injeded 
Quickfilver  into  a few  others  ; and  I ftill  preferve  the  Pre- 
parations I made  then,  and  have  demonftrated  them,  fince 
that  time,  annually  in  my  Public  Courfes  of  Ledures.  In 
17 58,  I publilhed  a Defcription  of  them  *,  illuftrated  by  the 
Figures  reprinted  in  Table  IV.  of  this  Paper. 


SECT. 


T.  G.  Zinn,  de  Oculo,  Cap.  xiii.  §1.  “ Lachrymas  maxima  certe  ex  parte 

“ exhalare  videtur  arteriae  conjun&ivas,”  &c*  “ In  Homice  autem  hue  ufque 

“ accuratiffimorum  Anatomicorum  aciem  Du&us  illi  effugerunt : neque  mihi,  hac 
“ in  re,  illis  feliciorem  efle  contigit.” 


~ * Obfervations  Anatomical  and  Phyfiological,  1758,  8vo. 


OF  THE  LACHRYMAL  DUCTS. 


141 


SEC  T.  II. 

* ' 

Since  that  time,  finding  that  the  error  had  been  commit- 
ted, by  the  greater  number  of  Anatomifts  and  Surgeons,  of 
fuppofing,  that  the  Two  Duds  which  lead  from  the  Punda 
are  united  before  they  enter  the  Lachrymal  Sac ; and  think- 
ing, that,  in  certain  cafes,  it  might  be  material  in  the  cure, 
that  the  Surgeon  knew  that  one  of  thefe  Duds  might  be 
pervious,  though  the  other  was  obftruded  ; I had  an  ac- 
curate Drawing  of  them,  and  of  the  Lachrymal  Sac,  and 
Nafal  Dud,  made,  which  the  Reader  will  find  in  Table  V. 
Fig.  1.  And,  in  Fig.  2.  and  3.  of  the  fame  Table,  the  ap- 
pearance of  the  Termination  of  the  Nafal  Dud  is  delL 
neated. 


SECT.  III. 

To  trace  fully  the  courfe  of  the  Tears,  Two  other  Canals, 
I apprehend,  remain  to  be  defcribed  ; I mean  the  Dudus 
Incifivi.  In  Quadrupeds,  as  in  the  Ox  and  Sheep,  thefe  are 

S 


Two 


142 


OF  THE  LACHRYMAL  DUCTS. 


Two  Large  Canals,  open  at  both  ends,  and  palling  obliquely 
downwards  from  the  Nofe  into  the  Mouth,  reprefented  in 
Tables  VI.  and  VII. 

In  by  far  the  greater  number  of  Human  Subjects,  of  dif- 
ferent ages,  I have  not  been  able  to  find  any  vefiige  of  fuch 
Duds,  in  the  Bottom  of  the  Nofe,  or  Roof  of  the  Mouth  : 
But,  in  a few  fubjeds,  I have  found  them,  open  at  both  ends, 
but  always  very  much  fmaller  than  in  the  Quadruped.  In 
fome  of  thefe,  I palled  a Briftle  or  Small  Probe,  very  readi- 
ly, from  the  Nofe  into  the  Mouth.  In  two  or  three  fub- 
jeds,  I firft  poured  Quickfilver  from  the  Nofe,  through  the 
Dudus  Incifivus,  into  the  Mouth;  and  then,  with  a fmall 
Syringe,  injeded  through  it  Melted  Wax,  coloured  with  Ver- 
milion : And  thefe  Preparations,  which  I have  preferved 

and  demonftrated  for  a great  number  of  years,  are  accurate- 
ly delineated  in  Table  V.  Fig.  4,  5,  6,  7. 


SECT.  IV. 

In  Man,  and  in  the  Quadruped,  the  Lachrymal  Duds  are 
always  direded  towards  the  Forepart  of  the  Nofe,  and  ter- 


minate 


OF  THE  LACHRYMAL  DUCTS, 


M3 


minate  over  the  Dudus  Incilivi  j and  the  Dudus  Incilivi 
begin  from  Cups  or  Funnels*  which  form  the  Lowermoll 
Parts  of  the  Bottom  of  the  Noftrils  : So  that,  beyond  all 

doubt,  the  Tears  are  applied  to  and  pafs  through  them  into 
the  mouth  3 and  it  feems  by  no  means  improbable,  that  the 
Dudus  Incilivi,  like  the  Punda  Lachrymalia  and  Duds 
through  which  the  Tears  are  conveyed  into  the  Nofe,  may 
be  excited  into  adion  by  that  kind  of  Irritation  which  the 
Tears  give.  Why  they  are  always  found,  and  large,  in  the 
Quadruped  3 yet  generally  wanting,  and  always  fmall,  in 
Man  3 cannot,  without  farther  obfervation,  be  fatisfadorily 
explained. 


u» 


/ 


. 


EXPLANATION 


OF  THE 


TABLES, 


■ « . 


Explanation  of  Table  L 


* | ''HE  Firft  Four  Figures  of  this  Table  reprefent  the  Eye 
of  an  Ox  diffeded.  The  Fifth,  Sixth,  and  Seventh 
Figures  reprefent  the  Human  Eye0 


FI  Go 


92 


146 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


FIG.  1. 

Reprefents  the  Left  Eye  of  an  Ox,  viewed  obliquely  from 
above. 

a The  Trunk  of  the  Optic  Nerve. 

b c The  Outer  Part  of  the  Sclerotic  Coat. 

d e The  Cut  Edge  of  the  Sclerotic  Coat. 

f § A Se&ion  of  the  Root  of  the  Cornea. 

h The  Cryftalline  Lens,  feen  at  the  Pupil,  inclofed  in 

its  Capfule. 

i The  Inner  Radiated  Part  of  the  Iris. 

k The  Sphinder  Mufcle  of  the  Iris. 

I m The  Outer-Iide  of  the  Choroid  Coat. 


a The 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


147 


n The  Ciliary  Circle,  joining  the  Choroid  Coat  to  the 

Root  of  the  Iris,  and  Both  thefe  Coats  to  the 
Sclerotic  Coat. 

0 A Portion  of  the  Iris  inverted,  after  cutting  it. 

p The  Ciliary  ProcefTes  of  the  Choroid  Coat,  the  Ex- 

tremities of  which  float  in  the  Pofterior  Chamber 
of  the  Aqueous  Humour,  or  between  the  Back-part 
of  the  Iris  and  the  Cryftalline  Lens. 

q The  Retina  iffuing  from  the  Optic  Nerve. 

r The  Middle  Part  of  the  Retina. 

/ The  Choroid  Coat,  lined  with  its  Black  Paint,  be- 

tween the  Ciliary  Circle  and  the  Continuation  of 
the  Retina  forwards. 


In 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


T Ao 
14^ 


In  FIG.  2. 

The  fame  Eye  is  reprefented  more  fully  difletfled. 
a Reprefents  the  Trunk  of  the  Optic  Nerve.. 

b c The  Sclerotic  Coat  cut  and  turned  aflde. 
d e A Sedion  of  the  Cornea  near  its  Root. 

& 

f The  Under  Half  of  the  Iris. 

g The  Cryftalline  Lens  inclofed  in  its  Capfule. 

h i The  Outer-hde  of  the  Choroid  Coat. 
k l The  Ciliary  Circle. 

m The  Ciliary  Procelfes,  with  their  Extremities  floating 

in  the  Aqueous  Humour  between  the  Iris  and  the 
Lens. 


n A 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


149 


n,  A Portion  of  the  Iris  inverted. 

# The  Extremities  of  a Number  of  the  Ciliary  Pro- 

ceffes inverted,  to  fliew  how  far  they  are  loofe. 

p The  Middle  Part  of  the  Retina. 

q The  Doublings  or  Ciliary  Procefles  of  the  Retina, 

from  which  the  Black  Paint,  lining  the  Ciliary 
Proceffes  of  the  Choroid  Coat,  is  walked  off. 

r The  Ciliary  Proceffes  of  the  Retina  divided  into 

Minute  Fibres,  which  are  inferred  into  the  Anterior 
Part  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Gryftalline  Lens. 


T 


In 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  L 


' 150 


In  FIG.  3. 

After  removing  the  Cornea,  the  Iris,  the-  Choroid  Coat  with 
its  Paint,  and  inflating  the  Canal  difcovered  by  Dr  Petit, 
a Fore  View  is  given  of  the  Cryflalline  Lens,  with  the  Ter- 
mination of  the  Retina,  by  Doublings  or  Ciliary  Procefles, 
in  the  Forepart  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Lens,  a very  little 
within  its  Outer  Edge. 

a Reprefents  the  Forepart  of  the  Cryflalline  inclofed  in 

its  Capfule. 

b c The  Vitreous  Humour  covered  by  the  Retina. 

d A Hole  cut  in  the  Forepart  of  the  Canal  of  Petit, 
by  which  it  was  inflated. 

e f The  Circular  Canal  of  Petit  inflated,  to  fhew  that  it  is 
not  Cylindrical,  but  Cellular,  fomewhat  refembling 
the  Colon. 

g h The 


1 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


151 

g h The  Doublings  or  Ciliary  Proceiles  of  the  Retina, 
adhering  to  the  Anterior  Layer  of  the  Capfule  ot 
the  Vitreous  Humour,  and,  with  that,  forming  the 
Forepart  of  the  Canal  of  Petit. 

i The  Minute  Terminations  of  the  Ciliary  Proceiles  of 

the  Retina,  in  the  Anterior  Part  of  the  Capfule  of 
the  Lens,  very  near  to  the  Outer  Edge  of  the 
Lens. 


FIG.  4. 

In  this  Figure,  a Side  View  is  given  of  the  Cryftalline 
Lens  and  Vitreous  Humour  adhering  together,  and  their 
Capfules  entire. 

a b The  Vitreous  Humour  inclofed  in  its  Capfule. 
g The  Forepart  of  the  Cryftalline  Lenp. 

T 2 


d e The 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


The  Roots  of  the  Ciliary  Procefies  of  the  Retina, 
with  fome  of  the  Black  Paint  of  the  Choroid  Coat 
adhering  to  their  Outer  Side,  and  the  Anterior 
Layer  of  the  Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour 
lining  them. 

The  Infertion  of  the  Retina,  with  the  Anterior  Lay- 
er of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  in  the  Forepart  of  the 

Capfule  of  the  Lens. 

✓ 

An  Oblong  Hole  cut  in  the  Outer  Part  of  the  Canal  - 
of  Petit,  through  which  the  Outer  Edge  of  the 
Lens  is  feen,  covered  with  its  proper  Capfule, 
forming  the  Inner-fide  of  the  Canal  of  Petit. 

The  Anterior,  and  k the  Pofierior,  Layer  of  the 
Capfule  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  fixed  to  the  Cap- 
fule of  the  Lens  at  a confiderable  diftance  from 
each  other.  Hence  it  appears,  that  the  Forepart 
of  the  Canal  of  Petit  is  formed  by  the  Anterior 
Layer  of  the  Vitreous  Humour,  covered  by  the 
Retina  ; the  Pofierior  Part  of  it,  by  the  Vitreous 
Humour,  covered  by  the  Pofierior  Layer  of  its 

Capfule  3 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


553 


Capfule  and  that  the  Xnner-hde  of  it,  is  formed 
by  the  Edge  of  the  Cryilalline,  covered  by  its 
proper  Capfule  only,,  where  its  greatefl  Diameter 
is  found,  or  where  the  Two  Lenfes  which  com- 
pofe  it  are  conjoined. 

I The  Backpart  of  the  Cryilalline  Lens  feen  through 

the  Vitreous  Humour. 


FIG.  5.  & (L 

In  thefe  Figures,  the  Connexion  of  the  Coats  of  the  Hu- 
man Eye  is  reprefented.  In  Fig.  5.  the  Parts  are  repre- 
fented  of  their  Natural  Size  : In  Fig.  6.  they  are  magni, 

fed  to  Two  Diameters. 

a The  Optic  Nerye, 

b c The  Sclerotic  Coat,  cut  and  turned  afide> 

d The  Cut  Edge  of  the  Cornea. 


e-  The : 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


The  Iris. 

The  Forepart  of  the  Lens. 

The  Outer  Sides  of  the  Choroid  Coat. 

The  Ciliary  Circle. 

The  Iris  cut  and  turned  backwards. 

The  Ciliary  Procefles  of  the  Choroid  Coat  in  their 
natural  fltuation,  with  their  Extremities  floating 
loofe  in  the  Aqueous  Humour,  and  covering  the 
Outer  Edge  of  the  Lens. 

The  Extremities  of  the  Ciliary  Procefles  turned  back, 
to  fhew  how  much  of  them  is  loofe,  or  unconnedt- 
ed  with  the  Parts  on  the  Inner-fide  of  them. 

The  Middle  Part  of  the  Retina. 

The  Anterior  Part  of  the  Retina,  conne&ed  to  the 
Capfule  of  the  Lens  by  the  Fibrous  Extremities  of 
its  Ciliary  Procefles. 


FIG. 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


i55 


ajnr"  £/sm j&t  tvmvz?irxia& 


FIG . 7. 

This  Figure  reprefents  the  Retina  lining  the  Pofcerior 

Part  of  the  Ciliary  Procelfes,  and  inferred  into  the  Capfule 

of  the  Lens. 

a b The  Inner-fide  of  a Part  of  the  Sclerotic  Coat* 

c d The  Ciliary  Proceffes  of  the  Retina,  on  the  Inner- 
fide  of  the  Paint  which  lines  the  Ciliary  Proceifes 
of  the  Choroid  Coat. 

/ The  Pofterior  Part  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens  inclofed 

in  its  Capfule. 

e The  Fibrous  Extremities  of  the  Ciliary  Precedes  of 

the  Retina,  in  their  courfe,  over  the  Edge  of  the 
Cryftalline  Lens,  to  their  Terminations  in  the 
Forepart  of  its  Capfule. 


Explanation 


156  EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I.* 


Explanation  of  Table  I. 


FIG.  I. 

» Reprefents  the  Human  Eye  difleded. 
a The  Optic  Nerve. 

h b The  Sclerotic  Coat,  cut  and  turned  outwards. 

c The  Sclerotic  Coat,  cut  and  turned  forwards  with 

the  Cornea  d. 

js  e One-half  of  the  Iris  in  its  place. 


/ The 


TAB.  I.  *. 


S' 


i 


(L c&A 


V 


\ 


' ■ % 


/ 

I g 

H H 

h 

i 

k 

l 

7)1 

71 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I.*  157 

The  Pupil  and  Cryltalline  Lens  in  its  place. 

The  Ciliary  Circle. 

The  Choroid  Coat. 

The  Ciliary  Procelles  feen  in  their  places,  by  cutting 
off  a portion  of  the  Iris. 

A Portion  of  the  Iris  cut  and  turned  back. 

The  Floating  Points  of  the  Ciliary  Procelles  turned 
backwards. 

The  Middle  Smooth  Part  of  the  Retina,  feen  by 
cutting  a Hole  in  the  Choroid  Coat, 

The  Roots  of  the  Ciliary  Procelles  of  the  Retina,  to 
which  the  Black  Paint  of  the  Ciliary  Procelles  of 
the  Choroid  Coat  adheres. 

The  Ciliary  Procelles  of  the  Retina,  inferted  into  the 
Capfule  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens. 


U 


FIG. 


153 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I.* 


■e 

FIG.  2. 

Reprefents,  chiefly,  the  Circle  of  Petit  in  the  Human  Eye. 

a a The  Vitreous  Humour  inclofed  in  its  Capfule. 

b The  Cryftalline  Lens  inclofed  in  its  Capfule. 

c The  Ciliary  Procefles  of  the  Retina  inferted  into  the 

Capfule  of  the  Cryftalline  Lens. 

d The  Circular  Canal  of  Petit  inflated. 

e A Hole  cut  in  the  Circular  Canal  of  Petit,  at  which 

the  Air  Amending'  it  was  blown  in. 

/ 


Explanation 


€> 


tab.il 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  XL 


159 


Explanation  of  Table  II. 


Fig.  i.  reprefents  the  Forepart,  and  Fig.  2.  the  Backpart, 
of  the  Iris  of  an  Ox,  of  its  Natural  Size. 


In  FIG.  1. 

A A Reprefents  the  Cut  Edge  of  the  Sclerotic  Coat. 

B B The  Pupil, 

C C The  Sphinder  Mufcle  of  the  Iris. 

D D The  Inner  Part  of  the  Iris,  in  which  the  Fibres  are 

radiated,  without  any  appearance  of  a Sphinder 
Mufcle. 

U 2 


In 


i6o 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  II. 


In  FIG.  2. 

A A Reprefents  the  Inner-fide  of  the  Anterior  Part  of  the 
Choroid  Coat. 

B B The  Ciliary  Proceiles. 

C C The  Pupil. 

D D The  Outer  and  Back  Part  of  the  Iris,  which  conlifts 
of  Vafcular  and  Radiated  Fibres  that  conceal  the 
Sphin&er  Mufcle. 

E E The  Inner  and  Back  Part  of  the  Iris,  compofed,  like 
its  Forepart,  of  Radiated  and  Vafcular  Fibres. 


Explanation 


\ 


4 


dclr* 

rcAtleJ^  tfc  ■ 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  III. 


161 


Explanation  of  Table  III. 


The  Two  Figures  in  this  Table  reprefent  the  Pofierior 
Part  of  the  Human  Iris,  delineated  by  Mr  Fyfe.  Fig.  i. 
Ihews  it  of  the  Natural  Size,  and  Fig.  2.  reprefents  it  Mag- 
nified. 

A A The  Inner-fide  of  the  Anterior  Part  of  the.  Choroid 
Coat. 

4 

B B The  Ciliary  Procefies. 

C C The  Veflels  and  Radiated  Fibres. 

D D The  Mufcular  Sphincter  of  the  Irisa, 

E The  Pupil, 


Explanation 


1 62 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  IV. 


Explanation  of  Table  IV. 


This  Table  reprefents  the  Right  Eye  with  its  Mufcles, 
viewed  obliquely  from  its  Upper  and  Outer  Side. 

a Reprefents  the  Eyeball. 

b Part  of  the  Upper  Eyelid. 

1 

c The  Optic  Nerve. 

d The  Attollens  Falpebram  Superiorem  drawn  alide  by 

a Pin. 

e The  Redus  Attollens  Oculum. 

/ The  Redus  Abdudor  Oculi. 


S The 


tab.iv: 


/. 


< 


.* 


✓ 


l 


A 


./ 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  IV.  163 

The  Redus  Addudor  Oculi. 

The  Rectus  Beprimens  Oculurn. 

The  Flelhy  Belly  of  the  Obliquus  Superior  Trochlea** 
ris. 

The  Trochlea,  fixed  to  the  Os  Fronds,  with  the  Ten- 
don palling  through  it. 

The  Infertion  of  the  Tendon  of  the  Trochlearis  in 
the  Eyeball. 

The  Inferior  Oblique  Mufcle  taking  its 'rife  from  the- 
Superior  Maxillary  Bone. 

The  Infertion  of  the  Tendon  of  the  Inferior  Oblique 
Mufcle  in  the  Eyeball, 


Explanation 


164 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


Explanation  of  Table  V. 


FIG.  1. 

Reprefents  the  Upper  Eyelid  of  the  Right  Side  of  the  Human 
Subjedl,  with  the  Glandula  Innominata  Galeni,  or  Lachry- 
mal Gland. 

a The  Inner-hde  of  the  Upper  Eyelid. 

p The  Two  Pundta  Lachrymalia,  into  which  the  dif- 

ferent Ends  of  a Bit  of  Wire  are  introduced. 

b Part  of  the  Under  Eyelid. 

c The  External  Canthus. 

d The  Thicker  Conglomerated  Part  of  the  Lachrymal 
Gland. 


e A 


I 


S%-JA£c//c%J  / 


I 


■ 4 


■j 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


165 


A Number  of  Smaller  Lachrymal  Glands,  lying  be- 
tween d and  the  Conj undiva,  which,  for  diftinc- 
tion’s  fake,  I fliall  call  Glandulae  Lachrymales  Con- 
gregatae. 

Four  Briftles  introduced  into  the  Duds  of  the  La- 
chrymal Gland. 

One  of  thefe  Duds,  into  which  Quickfilver  was  in- 
jeded,  which  is  hid  where  it  paffes  between  the 
Glandule  Congregatae  e%  but  appears  again,  where 
it  comes  out  of  the  Glandula  Innominata,  com- 
pofed  of  Three  Branches. 

A Part  of  the  Tunica  Conjundiva,  at  which,  before 
the  Preparation  was  immerfed  in  Spirits,  the  Ori- 
fices of  two  or  three  very  fmall  Lachrymal  Duds,, 
could  be  perceived. 


X 


F I G, 


a66 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


FIG.  2. 

Reprefents  the  like  Parts  on  the  Left  Side,  viewed  from  the 
Upper  and  Outer  Side. 

a The  Outer  Side  of  the  Tunica  Conjunctiva  of  the 

Left  Eye. 

be  ddee  The  fame  as  in  Fig.  I. 

/ The  Artery  of  the  Lachrymal  Gland  injeded. 

g The  End  of  a Brittle  put  into  one  of  the  Lachrymal 

Duds  b,  after  I had  injeded  the  Dud  with  Quick- 
filver. 

i i Two  Branches  joining  to  compofe  the  Dud  h. 


F I G. 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


167 


F I G.  3. 

Reprefents  the  Right  Eye  of  the  Common  Hen, 

l 

a An  Outline  of  the  Comb  and  Beak, 

b The  Eyebalh 

c The  Eyelids, 

d The  Membrana  Niditans. 

e A Probe  palled  into  the  Dud  of  the  Lachrymal 

Gland, 

/ A Probe  pafled  into  the  Undermoll  Pundum  La- 

chrymale, 

g A Probe  palfed  from  the  Uppermoft  Pundum  La- 

chrymale  into  the  Nofe^  and  from  the  Nofe  into, 

the  Mouth. 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


In  FIG.  4. 

Represents  the  Bottom  of  the  Eyeball  in  the  fame 
Fowl. 

The  Optic  Nerve. 

The  Lachrymal  Gland. 

Part  of  the  Membrana  Nidlitans. 

A Probe  paiTed  into  the  Lachrymal  Du6h 


Explanation 


f 'N 


* 


\ 


. ; 


i 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VL 


169 


Explanation  of  Table  VL 


In  FIG,  1, 

A Reprefents  the  Upper  and  B the  Under  Eyelid. 

C D Bridies  introduced  into  the  Two  Punda  Lachryma- 
lia,  and  the  Duds  from  them  cut  open. 

E F The  Termination  of  thefe  Duds  in  the  Lachrymal 
Sac,  by  two  diftind  Orifices. 

G FI  I The  Lachrymal  Sac  and  Nafal  Dud  laid  open* 


In 


£7° 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VL 


In  FIG.  2.  Sc  3. 

The  Termination  of  the  Nafal  Lachrymal  Du <51  in  the  Nofe 
is  feen  at  E E,  under  the  Os  Spongiofum  Inferius  D, 


FIG.  4. 

ABBC  Reprefents  Part  of  the  Septum  Narium. 

D The  Mouth  of  the  Left  Euftachian  Tube. 

E The  Superior,  and  F the  Inferior,  Os  Spongiofum  of 

the  Left  Side. 

H I K The  Du&us  Incifivus  of  the  Right  Side  laid  open, 
after  palling  a Brillle  through  it. 


F I G, 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VI 


172 


F I G.  5. 

A B Reprefents  the  Septum  Narium  cut  horizontally. 

C D The  Upper  Orifices  of  the  Du&us  Incifivi. 

E The  Dentes  Incifivi. 


FIG.  6. 

By  cutting  off  the  Foreparts  of  the  Upper  Jaw-Bones,  the 
Du&us  Incifivi  are  feen,  with  Probes  paffed  through  them 
from  the  Bottom  of  the  Nofe  into  the  Mouth, 

A The  Bottom  of  the  Septum  Narium  cut  horizontally, 

B C The  Bottom  of  the  Cavity  of  the  Nofe. 

de&fg  Briftles  paffed  through  the  Ductus  Incifivi. 


F I G. 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VI. 


172 


FIG.  7. 

In  this  Figure,  the  Openings  of  the  Dudtus  Incifivi  into 
the  Mouth  are  reprefented,  from  a Perfon,  very  far  advanced 
in  life,  who  had  loft  all  the  Teeth  of  both  Jaws. 

a b The  Lower  Orifices  of  the  Du&us  Incifivi. 


Explanation 


I 


c. 


l 


\ ’ 


* I 


$k 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VII. 


Explanation  of  Table  VIL 


FIG.  i. 


A Reprefents  the  Upper-Lip  of  the  Ox, 


173 


B 


The  Callous  Gum. 


C The  Roof  of  the  Mouth, 

E E The  Natural  Openings  of  the  Two  Dudus  Incilivi, 

F The  Under  Part  of  the  Right  Dudus  Incilivus  cut: 
open  its  whole  length. 


Xii 


Y 


I74 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VIL 


In  F I G.  2. 

A Reprefents  the  Upper  Lip  of  the  Sheep. 

B The  Callous  Gum. 

C The  Roof  of  the  Mouth. 

E The  Natural  Termination  of  the  Left  Dudtus  Incifi- 
vus. 

F A Probe  palled  from  the  Nofe,  through  the  Right 
Du&us  Incifiyus,  into  the  Mouth, 


Explanation 


TAB. -Mil 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VIII. 


Explanation  of  Table  VIII. 


In  this  Table,  the  Right  Lachrymal  Nafal  Du6l  of  a 
Sheep  is  traced  to  its  Termination  in  the  Nofe  ; which, 
when  the  Face  of  the  Animal  is  placed  horizontally,  will  be 
found  to  be  over  the  Bottom  of  the  Nofe,  a very  little  be- 
hind the  Upper  End  of  the  Dudtus  Incilivus, 

a Reprefents  the  Os  Nafi  of  the  Right  Side  cut. 

b The  Os  Spongiofum  Inferius. 

c The  Eyelids. 

d e Probes  palled  through  the  Pundta  Lachrymalia  into 
the  Lachrymal  Sac,  , 


/ g The 


176 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VIII. 


f g The  Lachrymal  Nafal  Dud  laid  open. 

h i A Probe  pafled  from  the  Lachrymal  Dud  into  the 

Cavity  of  the  Nofe. 

hi  A Probe  palled  through  the  Canalis  Inciiivus. 
m The  Fiflure  in  the  Upper  Lip. 


THE  END  OF  TREATISE  SECOND. 


OBSERVATIONS 


ON  THE 


ORGAN 

O F 

HEARING 

* 

I N 

i - 

M A 

N 

AND 

OTHER 

ANIMALS, 

BY  ' 

. | 

ALEXANDER  MONRO,  M.  D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  MEDICINE,  ANATOMY,  AND  SURGERY, 
IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  EDINBURGH, 


EDINBURGH: 

PRINTED  BY  ADAM  NEILL  AND  COMPANY 


3 797 


•< 


. 


/ 


■ 

■ 


- 


' 


A Table  of  the  Contents  of  Treatife  111 


Page 

PREFACE,  - - - - - 181 


C H A P.  I. 

Of  the  Size,  Shape,  and  Relative  Situation,  of  the  Ca- 
vities of  the  Ear,  - ~ - - 187 

CHAP.  II. 

Of  the  Structure  of  the  Human  Cochlea,  = 189 


CHAP.  III. 

Of  the  Ear  in  Whales,  - 203 


CHAP.  IV. 

Of  the  Ear  in  Cartilaginous  P'ilhes,  - 207 


CHAP.  V. 

A Summary  of  the  Chief  Circumflances  above  defcribed,  213 


CHAP. 


CONTENTS  OF  TREATISE  III. 


180 


CHAP.  VI. 

Atteftation  as  to  the  Fadts  above  defcribed, 


Page 

219 


CHAP.  VII. 


Remarks  on  Profeflor  Scarpa’s  Book  on  the  Ear,  225 


Explanation  of  the  Tables, 


241 


PREFACE. 


4 


PREFACE. 


QO  far  back  as  the  year  1756,  whilft  I was  in  Berlin,  ob- 
ferving,  that  no  Anatomift  had  traced  the  Difiribution 
of  the  Portio  Mollis  of  the  Auditory  Nerve  within  the  Co- 
chlea, Veftible,  and  Semicircular  Canals;  or,  that  the  Struc- 
ture of  thofe  principal  parts  of  the  Ear  on  which  ultimately 
Imprefiion  is  made,  and  to  which  all  the  other  pieces  of  its 
complex  and  elegant  machinery  are  fubfervient,  was  unknown; 
I began  to  inveftigate  the  fubjedt  with  accuracy,  and  foon 
found  the  means  of  tracing  the  progrefs  of  the  Portio  Mol- 
lis, the  minute  branches  of  which  I profecuted  upon  the 
Cochlea  chiefly, 

A a 


From 


PREFACE. 


182 

From  that  time  downwards,  I have  demonftrated  thefe  an- 
nually, in  my  Courfes  of  Le&ures  in  this  Univerfity  ; and, 
in  1783,  when  I publifhed  my  Obfervations  on  the  Nervous 
Syftem,  I gave  a Defcription  of  thefe  Preparations,  illuftra- 
ted  by  Figures,  (See  Tables  XXIX.  XXX.  & XXXI.)  j 
and,  before  publication,  I fhewed  my  Preparations  to  feveral 
excellent  judges. 

Two  years  thereafter,  in  1785,  in  a Work  I publiihed  on 
the  Structure  and  Phyliology  of  Fifhes,  compared  with  thofe 
of  Man  and  other  Animals  ; I defcribed  the  Parts  of  the 
Ear  in  the  Whale,  in  Amphibious  Animals,  and  in  Fifhes  3 
and  illuftrated  my  Defcriptions  with  a Number  of  Figures. 
(See  Tables  VII.  XXXIV.  XXXV.  XXXVI.  XXXVII. 
XXXVIII.  & XXXIX.) 

Soon  thereafter,  to-wit  in  1787,  I received  a Letter  from 
the  late  Dr  Camper,  in  which  he  denies  the  exigence  of 
Semicircular  Canals  in  Whales,  and  calls  in  queftion  that  of 
the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus  in  the  Skate  and  Squalus 
Squatina,  which  I had  defcribed. 


I fhould 


PREFACE, 


1S3 


I fliould  not  have  pointed  out  to  the  Public  what  I knew 
to  be  erroneous  in  Dr  Camper’s  Letter,  if  he  had  not,  at 
the  fame  time,  written  me,  that  he  intended  to  have  his  Re- 
marks inferted  into  a German  Tranflation  of  my  Book  on 
Fifties,  which  he  told  me  was  then  about  to  be  publiftied  by 
Dr  Schneider,  “ in  order  to  put  me  right,  and  to  be  ufe- 
“ ful  to  others 

Still  later,  in  1787,  Dr  Antonius  Scarpa,  Profeftor  of 
Anatomy  and  Surgery  in  Pavia,  Ticinum,  in  a large  Work, 
entitled,  “ Difquifitiones  Anatomicse  de  Auditu  et  Olfadlu,” 
illuflrated  with  many  Tables,  has  reprefented  the  Defcription 
I had  given  of  the  Human  Ear  as  inaccurate ; and  the  whole 
of  my  Account  of  the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus,  and  of 
the  Communication  of  it  with  the  Interior  Parts  of  the  Ear, 
and  of  thefe  with  each  other,  in  the  Cartilaginous  Fifties,  as 
a mere  fi&ion. 

A a 2 Although  • 


* I obferve  this  Tranflation,  by  J,  G„  Schneider,  with  Dr  Camper’s  Notes, 
quoted  by  Dr  Soemmering  as  publiflied,  in  1787,  at  Leipfic  ; but  I have  not 
yet  feen  it. 


184 


PREFACE. 


Although,  from  the  attention  I had  paid  to  thele  fubjeds, 
and  that  I had  in  my  pofleflion  the  feveral  Preparations  from 
which  my  Defcriptions  were  taken,  and  had  demonftrated 
thefe  publicly  in  my  Courfes  of  Ledures,  and  privately  to 
many  good  judges  of  fuch  matters  ; yet,  the  reputation 
which  Dr  Camper  and  Dr  Scarpa  have  acquired,  made  it 
neceflary  for  me,  on  my  own  account,  and  likewife  to  pre- 
vent others  from  being  milled,  by  their  authority,  on  thefe 
highly  curious  and  interelling  parts  of  Anatomy,  to  refume 
my  refearches  on  thefe  fubjeds. 

The  Public  will  reap  the  advantage  of  having  thefe  organs 
more  fully  defcribed,  and  of  feeing  them  more  elegantly  deli- 
neated, than  in  my  former  Figures,  by  my  allillant  Mr  Fyfe, 
from  recent  Preparations,  which,  at  my  requeft,  he  under- 
took to  make  ; and  which  he  has,  by  my  direction,  exe- 
cuted with  great  dexterity  and  accuracy. 

All  the  Preparations  from  which  the  Figures  I formerly 
publilhed,  or  which  I now  publilh,  have  been  taken,  are  Hill 
in  my  pofteftion.  They  have  all  been  lately  demonftrated  to 
the  Members  of  the  Royal  Society  of  this  place,  and  mi- 
nutely examined  by  fuch  Members  as  are  beft  qualified  to 
judge  of  fuch  fubjeds,  after  they  were  made  acquainted  with 

the 


PREFACE. 


3 


the  doubts  raifed  by  Camper  and  Scarpa,  and  that  their 
atteftation  as  to  fads  would  be  requeued. 

I fhall  now  proceed  to  defcribe  the  Structure  of  fome  of 
the  principal  Parts  of  the  Ear,  in  Man  and  in  other  Ani- 
mals j I fhall  then  add  the  atteftation,  as  to  the  accuracy 
of  my  Defcription  and  Tables,  of  thofe  Members  of  the 
Royal  Society,  who  have  examined  my  Preparations,  and  Fi- 
gures taken  from  them  ; and  I fhall  conclude  with  a few. 
Obfervations  on  Profeffor  Scarpa’s  Work. 


TREATISE 


r 


l 


r 


/ 


& 


TREATISE  THIRDs 


ON  THE  EAR. 


CHAP.  L 

Of  the  Size,  Shape,  and  relative  Situation* 
of  the  Cavities  of  the  Ear. 


rTT',HAT  the  Size,  Shape,  and  relative  Situation,  of  the  Ca- 
vities of  the  Ear,  might  be  more  diftinddy  perceived 
than  they  can  be  by  cutting  the  Bones  in  the  common  way, 
I propofed  to  my  Son,  to  fill  them  with  Metal,  and  then  to 
deftroy  the  Bone  ; which  he  executed  very  dexteroufiy  and 
fuccefsfully  : And  in  Four  Figures  of  Table  h an  exact 

Reprefentation 


1 83  SIZE,  &c.  OF  THE  CAVITIES  OF  THE  EAR. 

Reprefentation  is  given  of  his  Preparation,  from  Drawings 
of  it  by  Mr  Fyfe  ; to  which,  with  its  Explanation,  I fhall 
refer  the  Reader.  The  Cochlea,  in  particular,  is  fo  com- 
pletely filled  as  to  give  an  excellent  view  of  its  Size  and 
Figure. 

In  Table  II.  I have  reprefented  the  appearance  of  Caverns 
in  different  kinds  oT  Quadrupeds,  refembling  in  office  thofe 
of  our  Mafloid  Procefs.  Thefe  are,  in  proportion,  confider- 
ably  larger,  and  their  fides  thinner  and  more  elaftic,  than  in 
Man  j and  there  can  be  no  doubt,  that  the  greater  Acute- 
nefs  of  thofe  Animals  in  Hearing,  is,  in  part,  owing  to  the 
Strudure  of  thefe  Caverns. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  II. 


Of  the  Structure  of  the  Human  Cochlea. 


SECT.  i. 

TT  has  been  long  known,  that  the  Human  Cochlea  defcribes 
-**  two  complete  Gyri  or  Turns,  and  a Half  Turn  ; that  a 
central  conical  ofleous  Pillar,  called  Modiolus , is  continued 
to  the  Middle  of  its  Second  Gyrus  ; that  the  Gyri  are  di- 
vided, by  a Partition  called  Lamina  Spiralis,  into  Two  Wind- 
ing Canals,  called  Scales ; that  one  Scala  begins  from  the 
Veftible,  and  is  therefore  called  Scala  of  the  Vejlible , and  that 

B b the 


I90  OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA, 


the  other  begins  at  the  Foramen  Rotundum  in  the  Backpart  of 
the  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum , and  is  therefore  called  the  Sc  ala 
of  the  Tympanum;  that  the  Scalce  are  Wider  at  the  Veflible 
and  Foramen  Rotundum  than  at  the  Apex  of  the  Cochlea, 
or,  that  they  are  of  a Conical  figure  that  at  the  Apex  of 
the  Cochlea  they  communicate  with  each  other,  by  opening 
into  a Common  Tube,  called  Infundibulum  or  Funnel,  one  End 
of  which  begins  at  the  Termination  of  the  Modiolus,  and  the 
other  End  of  it  is  fixed  to  the  offeous  Top  or  Cupola  of  the 
Cochlea, 


SECT.  II. 

It  is  evident,  that  the  Offeous  Structure  of  the  Human 
Cochlea  muft  be  fully  explained,  before  we  can  defcribe  its 
Membranes  and  Courfe  of  its  Nerves  ; and  as  fome  material 
circumftances  have  efcaped  the  obfervation  of  Authors,  I 
ihall  give  a fnort  Defcription  of  this,  illuflrated  by  Fi- 
gures. 

The  Central  Pillar  of  the  Cochlea  confiffs  of  Two  Parts, 
called  Modiolus  and  Infundibulum. 

The 


/' 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA.  i9i 


The  Modiolus  is  not  a folid  OHeous  Cone,  as  has  been  ge- 
nerally fuppofed,  but  may  be  conlidered  as  a Hollow  Cone, 
containing  that  Branch  of  the  Portio  Mollis  which  is  de- 
fined for  the  Cochlea ; and  is  everywhere  Cribriform,  for 
the  Paflage  of  the  Branches  of  that  Nerve.  The  Infundibu- 
lum is  an  imperfect  Oileous  Funnel,  connected  to  the  Top  of 
the  Modiolus.  So  that  the  Modiolus  and  Infundibulum  are 
Two  Hollow  Conical  Bodies,  connected  together  by  their 

fmall  Ends.  The  Plate  which  is  between  them,  and  in  the 

/ 

Centre  of  both,  is  Cribriform.  Around  the  Modiolus,  the 
Firft  Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea  and  Half  of  the  Second  Gyrus 
are  defcribed ; the  other  Half  Gyrus  inclofes  the  Root  of 
the  Infundibulum;  and  the  Upper  Ends  of  the  Gyri,  which 
communicate  with  each  other,  are  covered  or  inclofed  by 
the  Cupola  of  the  Cochlea, 

The  Partitions  of  Bone  which  feparate  the  Gyri  from  each 
other,  are  not  compofed  of  One  Solid  Plate,  as  Authors  have 
reprefented  *,  but  conlift  of  Two  Plates,  conneded  to  the 
Modiolus  at  fome  diflance  from  each  other, 

B b 2 The 


* Du  Vernet. — Cassebohm,  T.  5.  F.  7,  8,  9,  10.— Scarpa,  P.  10.  F.  3.  7. 


192  OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA. 


The  Olfeous  Root  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis  is  likewife  com- 
pofed  -of  Two  Plates,  connected  to  the  Modiolus  or  Root  of 
the  Infundibulum,  at  fome  diltance  from  each  other. 

I have  already  obferved,  that  the  Modiolus  is  compofed  of 
a Cribriform  Hollow  Cone,  the  Sides  of  which  confift  of  Two 
Thin  Plates  ; and  the  Holes  in  it  are  much  more  Nume- 
rous than  they  have  been  defcribed  to  be  by  Authors,  and 
are  not  difpofed  in  the  Regular  Manner  they  have  repre- 
fented  them 

They  are  to  be  feen  in  every  part  of  the  Surface  of  the 
Modiolus  ; but  are  mod  numerous  clofe  to  the  Roots  of  the 
Olfeous  Septa  which  feparate  the  Gyri  from  each  other  ; 
and  clofe  to  the  Outer  Sides  of  the  Root  of  the  Lamina 
Spiralis.  They  are  numerous  in  the  Plate  between  the  Mo- 
diolus and  Infundibulum  ; and  when  the  Olfeous  Septa  and 
Lamina  Spiralis  are  cut  near  the  Modiolus,  they  are  feen  in 
the  Side  of  the  Modiolus,  between  the  Two  Plates  which 
compofe  the  Septa  and  Lamina  Spiralis. 


* Cassebohm,  T.  5.  F.  1C. 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA.  393 

in  Table  III.  the  Ofleous  Strudure  of  the  Cochlea  is  accu- 
rately reprefented,  magnified  to  Five  Diameters  ; and  a full 
Explanation  of  it  is  annexed,  to  which  I fliall  refer  the 
Reader. 


SECT.  III. 


It  had  been,  and  ftill  is,  generally  fuppofed,  that  the  For- 
tio  Mollis  is  distributed  upon  the  Periofteurn  lining  the  Co- 
chlea and  Semicircular  Canals  : But,  the  extraordinary 

Hardnefs  and  Thicknefs  of  thele  Bones,  the  Smallnefs  of  the 
Holes  by  which  the  Nerves  enter,  and  the  great  Delicacy 
and  Tendernefs  of  the  Membranes  within  the  Cochlea, — had 
prevented  Anatomists  from  tracing  the  Courfe  of  the  Bran- 
ches of  the  Portio  Mollis  within  the  Os  Petrofum,  and  from 
perceiving  the  nature  of  the  Interior  Membranes,  and  the. 
manner  in  which  the  Nerves  terminate  upon  thefe. 


194  OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA. 


To  fhew  the  Reader  how  little  was  known  upon  thele 
fubje&s,  I fhall  quote,  at  the  bottom  of  the  page,  the  ac- 
count given  of  them  by  the  mo  ft  eminent  Anatomifts  of  the 
prefent  century  * **. 


As 


* Valsalva,  de  Aure  Humana,  Cap.  iii.  § 14.  “ Vidique  demum  minima 

u quaedam  foramina, per  quae  nerves;  fibrillae  Coehleam  fubeunt.  Intra 

“ hanc  vero  eaedem  probabiliter  in  membranam  expanfae.” 

Winslow,  Exp.  An.  P.  2.  S.  x.  § 409.  1732.  “ La  Portion  Molle  du  Nerf 

“ Auditif  aboutit  par  fon  tronc  a la  grande  foiTette  du  Trou  Auditif  Interne,  ou 
“ les  filets  de  ce  tronc  pafifent  par  plufieurs  petits  troncs  de  la  bafe  du  Lima^on, 
“ en  partie  au  Periofte  des  Canaux  demicirculaires,  en  partie  au  Periofte  Interne 
“ des  demi-canaux  du  Limagon.”  He  fays  nothing  of  their  appearance  or  diftri- 
bution  on  this  Periojieum. 

Casjeeomm,  de  Aure  Humana.  1734-  Tr.  v.  § 227.  “ Neque  in  Cochlea 

<£  Humana  filamentum  nerveum  unquam  obfervavi.” 

Haller,  El.  Phyf.  Lib.  xv.  § 38.  1763.  “ Nervum  autem  aliquem  in  con- 

fpicua  filamenti  fpecie,  per  Cochlea  fpiras  circumduci,  (uti  pingit  Valsalva), 
“ nunquam  vidi.  Sed  nequidem,  mantis  Anatomicae,  etiam  fumma  induftria,  Ner- 
« vulos  ex  modiolo  per  foramina,  jam  a nobis  expofita,  aut  in  fcalam  cochleae  alter- 
£<  utram,  aut  in  duplicis  laminaeque  fpiralis  membranaceum  complementum,  effi- 

**  cientis  perioftei  intervallum  duxerit.” 


Haller, 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA*  195 


SECT.  IV. 


As,  previous  to  1756,  when  I firft  attempted  to  trace  the 
Portio  Mollis  within  the  Cochlea,  I had  repeatedly  rendered 

Injected 


Haller,  in  Pr.  Lin.  Phyf.  § 493.  “ Alter  ramus,  qui  Cochleae  fulcum  fubit, 
“ obfcuram  finem  habet.” 

Cotunnius,  de  Aquod.  Auris  Plum.  1761.  § 25,  “ Continuari  tamen  hos 

“ nervorum  dudlus  cum  canaliculis  inter  lameilas  fpiralis  laminae  defcriptis  (xiv.) j 
“ perque  hos  ad  intervallum  zonae  cochleae  nervorum  ramulos  tranfire,  etfi  pro 
“ fumma  tenuitate  rerum  non  videam  infpexiffe,  extra  omne  tamen  dubium  afleri 
u poffe  credo.  Ultra  de  hoc  nervo  me  nihil  fcire,  lincerus  fateor.” 

J.  Fr.  Meckel  junior.  1777.  § :-:xiii.  p.  40.  “ Aperto  enim  cochleae  tubo 

“ a foramine  rotundo  ad  ufque  tertium  iplius  gyrum,  ita  ut,  fupra  et  infra  fep- 
“ +um  utraque  fcala  periofteo  induta  luftrari  potuerit,  etiam  vitrorum,  objedla, 
u multum  augentium,  minifterio,  nil  intueri  licuit,  nifi  albas  inter  trabeculas  Co- 
11  chleae  ftrias.” 

Martin,  de  Nervis.  1781.  S.  2.  p.  82.  “ Vafculum  aliquod  fanguiferum 
u pro  nervo  habitum  eft,  vel  etiam  portiunculas  membranarum  filamentorum  fimi- 
“ litudinem  retulerunt.” 

Sabatier.  1781.  T 3.  p.  252.  “ Mes  obfervations  n’ont  pu  me  donner. 

u des  lunaieres  fur  un  chofe  auffi  obfcure*” 


i96  OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA 

InjeCted  Bones  foft  and  tranfparent,  and,  in  doing  fo,  had 
remarked,  that,  though  the  Bones  were  made  very  Tender, 
the  Membranes  connected  with  them  retained  a confiderable 
degree  of  Tenacity,  it  readily  occurred  to  me,  that  by  this 
means  I might  be  enabled  to  trace  the  whole  progrefs  of 
the  Portio  Mollis. 

Accordingly  my  fuccefs  equalled  my  expectation  3 and 
with  a great  deal  of  pains  I detached  the  Os  Petrofum,  and 
the  whole  External  Oileous  Shell  of  the  Cochlea  from  its 
Interior  Membranes  ; and  then  took  out  the  Membranes, 
with  the  Modiolus  and  Lamina  Spiralis  fufpended  by  the 
Trunk  of  the  Portio  Mollis  : So  that,  by  proper  diffeCtion, 

I could  trace  and  fee  diitin&Iy,  not  only  the  Divifion  of  the 
Portio  Mollis  into  its  Larger  Branches,  but  the  whole  Pro- 
grefs and  Termination  of  thefe. 

I found,  That  the  Portio  Mollis  is  compofed  of  Two 
Blanches  nearly  equal  in  fize  3 one  of  which  fupplies  the 
Veftible  and  Semicircular  Canals,  and  the  other  the  Cochlea. 
See  Nervous  Syfiem,  Tab.  XXX.  Fig.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5. 

That  each  Branch  confifls  of  a great  Number  of  Small 
Cords.  See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  Fig.  1,  2,  3.  A A. 


That 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA.  197 


That  the  Small  Cords  of  both  Branches  pafs  through  dif- 
ferent minute  Holes  into  the  Veflible  and  Cochlea,  or,  that 
the  Bottom  of  the  Canal  in  the  Backpart  of  the  Os  Petro- 
fum,  commonly  called  Meatus  Auditorius  Internus,  is  Cribri- 
form. See  Nervous  Syftem,  Table  XXIX.  Fig.  12.  X Y Z 
cc  d e. 

As  the  Qfleous  Partitions  which  divide  the  Cochlea  into 
its  Gyri,  as  well  as  the  Lamina  Spiralis  which  divides  the 
Gyri  into  Scalae,  are  conne&ed  to  the  Circumference  of  the 
Modiolus  j we  might  expedt  to  find  the  Branches  of  the 
Portio  Mollis  conduced,  from  the  Modiolus,  to  the  Mem- 
branes lining  the  Cochlea,  by  means  of  thefe  Partitions,  or 
between  or  along  the  outer-fides  of  the  Two  Offeous  Plates 
which  compofe  them,  as  well  as  between  the  Two  Lamellte 
which  compofe  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  or  along  the  outer-fides 
of  thefe  j as  we  would  fuppofe,  that  the  Two  Sides  of  each 
Scala  fliould  have  Nerves  diftributed  on  them  in  the  fame 
manner. 

Accordingly,  on  profecuting  the  Branches  or  Fibres  of  the 
Portio  Mollis  with  the  utmoft  attention,  I find,  that  they, 
pafs  Outwards  from  the  Cavity  of  the  Modiolus,  through- 
innumerable  minute  Holes  or  Canals,  which  every  where 

C c perforate 


s9S  OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA. 


perforate  it.  Some  Fibrils  pafs  between  the  Two  Plates 
which  form  the  Septa  that  feparate  the  Gyri  from  each 
other.  A Hill  greater  number  of  Fibrils  pafies  through 
Holes  between  the  Two  Plates  which  compofe  the  Root  of 
the  Lamina  Spiralis.  But  by  far  the  greated  number  of  the 
Nervous  Fibrils  perforates  the  Sides  of  the  Modiolus,  between 
the  OJTeous  Septa  and  the  Lamina  Spiralis.  The  Fibrils 
which  pafs  through  the  Holes  that  are  neared;  to  the  Lami- 
na Spiralis,  run  to  the  Membrane  covering  the  Lamina  Spi- 
ralis i whilft  thofe  which  are  neared  to  the  Septa,  run,  in 
a contrary  direction,  to  the  Membranes  covering  the  Septa. 
We  perceive,  therefore,  that  the  part  of  the  Membrane 
lining  each  Scala  which  is  the  mod  didant  from  the  Mo- 
diolus, will  be  fupplied  by  the  Terminations  of  thefe  Two 
Sets  of  Fibrils  meeting.  The  Nervous  Fibrils  on  the  Sur- 
face of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  feem  larger,  and  are  more  re- 
gularly difpofed,  than  thofe  that  run  on  the  Surface  of  the 
Septa.  Two  Plates  are  found  in  the  Outer  Odeous  Part  of 
the  Lamina  Spiralis,  and  the  Space  between  them  is  filled 
with  Nervous  Fibres,  from  which  numerous  minute  Fibrils 
idue  between  the  Outer  Edges  of  the  Two  Plates.  There 
are  likewife  minute  Holes  in  the  Sides  of  each  of  the  Plates 
which  compofe  the  Lamina  Spiralis  j and  there  can  be  no 

doubt 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA.  199 

doubt  that  the  Nerves  between  the  Plates  are  connected 
with  thofe  which  run  on  their  External  Surface, 

The  laft  Branches  or  Fibres  of  the  Portio  Mollis  pafs 
through  the  Cribriform  Plate,  in  the  Top  of  the  Modiolus, 
which  is  common  to  it  and  the  Infundibulum,  to  fupply  the 
lad:  Half-Gyrus  and  Cupola  of  the  Cochlea.  See  Nervous 
Syftem,  Table  XXXI.  Fig.  1,  2,  3.  and  Table  I III.  of  this 
Work. 

I next  obferved,  that  the  feveral  Branches  of  the  Portio 
Mollis,  in  their  whole  courfe  along  the  Lamina  Spiralis, 
formed  an  elegant  and  intricate  Plexus,  by  innumerable 
Joinings  and  Separations  of  their  component  Fibrils.  See 
Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  Fig.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  Tab.  IIIL 
Fig.  1,  2,  3. 

At  the  Root  or  Ofteous  Part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  the 
Nerves  are  White  and  Opaque  j but  at  the  Flexible  and 
Membranous  Parts  they  are  Semipellucid*.  See  Nervous 
Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  Fig.  1,  2,  3,  4.  and  Tab.  III. 

This  Change  of  Colour  is  like  to  that  we  obferve  the  Op- 
tic Nerve  undergoes  on  entering  the  Eyeball  to  form  the 

C c 2 Xetina.:. 


200 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA. 


Retina  : and,  in.  both,  the  Change  of  Colour  is  not  very 

gradually  made,  but  fuddenly. 

On  comparing  the  Semipellucid  Outer-part  of  the  Lamina 
Spiralis  with  the  Retina  of  the  Eye,  I obferved  a remark- 
able difference  ; to-wit,  that  in  the  Retina  the  Texture 
feems  Pulpy  and  Uniform,  without  any  fuch  appearance  of 
Fibres  and  Network  as  we  might  exped  to  obferve  from  the 
name  Retina , which  has  been  fo  long  and  univerfally  given 
to  it  j whereas,  in  the  Ear,  Fibres  and  the  Continuation  of 
an  intricate  Network  can  be  feen  diftindtly  in  the  Semipel- 
lucid Part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  and  as  far  as  to  its  Outer 
Edge.  See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  Fig.  4.  E F G. 
and  Tab.  IIII.  Fig.  1,  2,  3. 

I have,  therefore,  in  my  Ledures,  long  obferved,  that  the 
term  Retina  was  improper  when  applied  to  the  Nerve  fpread 
out  on  the  Bottom  of  the  Eye,  and  had  been  given,  not  in 
confequenee  of  accurate  obfervation  of  the  Strudure*,  but 
from  a common  favourite  theory  of  Anatomifis,  which  fup- 
pofes  that  the  Brain  and  Nerves  coniift  of  Fibres.  In  the 
Ear,  the  term  may  be,'  with  great  propriety,  applied  to  de- 
fcribe  the  Appearance  of  the  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis 
in  their  courfe  on  the  Lamina  Spiralis. 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA.  201 


At  the  Outer-part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  the  Nervous  Fi- 
bres and  Network  become  much  lefs  evident  and,  upon 
the  Continuation  of  thefe  Membranes,  on  the  Inner-fides  of 
the  Gyri  of  the  Cochlea,  the  Nerves  feem  to  terminate  ha  a 
Semipellucid  Pulpy  Subftance,  very  like  to  the  Retina  of  the 
Eye. 


SECT.  V. 

I would  next  obferve,  that  the  Membrane  on  which  the 
Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis  terminate  in  the  outer  tranf- 
parent  part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis  and  on  the  Inner-fides 
of  the  Gyri  of  the  Cochlea,  is  not  the  Periofieum  of  the 
Lamina  Spiralis  or  of  the  Gyri,  as  has  been  univerfally  fiip- 
pofed,  but  is  as  different  from  it  as  the  Pleura  is  from  the 
Periofieum  of  the  Ribs.  It  is  thick,  foft,  demipellucid, 
and  but  flightly  conneded  to  the  Inner-fides  of  the  Gyri  ; 
and,  tracing  the  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis,  it  is  evident- 
ly formed  by  them  carrying  with  them  their  Pia  Mater, 
nearly,  as  the  Retina  is  formed  by  the  Optic  Nerve.  Be- 
fides,  after  detaching  it  from  the  Inner-fides  of  the  Gyri, 
the  Bone  is  fo  far  from  appearing  bare,  that  we  fee  Blood- 

vefiels 


202  OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HUMAN  COCHLEA. 

vefTels  running  upon  its  Surface,  fupported  by  Membrane, 
which  is  indeed  fo  thin  and  tender  that  we  cannot  eafily 
raife  it  by  difle&ion,  but  we  can  fhew  it  as  diftin&ly  as  tha 
Periofteum  which  lines  the  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum. 


CHAP, 


0 


CHAP.  III. 


Of  the  Ear  in  Whales. 


O OUNDj  I formerly  obferved  is  conveyed  to  the  Bot- 
tom  of  the  Ears  in  Whales, . by  the  fame  general  Struc- 
ture as  in  Man  and  Quadrupeds. 

They  are  all  provided  with  a Meatus  Auditorius  Externus, 
the  Orifice  into  which,  in  the  Cete  Delphinus,  is  extremely 
fmall  ; and  it  appears  to  me  probable,  that  they  poflefs  the 
power  of  fhutting  it,  and  excluding  the  water,  when  they 
plunge  to  a confiderable  depth.  In  the  Cete  Balaena,  (i.  of 
Linneus),  the  largefi:  of  the  Whale  kind,  there  is  within 

the 


* In  my  Book  on  Fifties. 


204 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  WHALES. 


the  Meatus  Auditorius  a Hard  Body,  upwards  of  an  Inch  in 
Length,  fliaped  like  an  Egg,  and  attached  by  its  fmall  end 
to  one  fide  of  the  Meatus  } which  undoubtedly  ferves  as  a 
Valve,  to  prevent  the  Water,  when  the  Whale  dives  deep, 
from  over-diftending  and  rupturing  the  Membrane  of  the 
Drum  f . 

Their  Membrana  Tympani  is  tied  by  a Chain  of  Bones  to 
the  Bottom  of  the  Tympanum  ^ but  in  this  Chain  the  Os 
Orbicular e is  wanting,  at  leaft  it  is  fo  in  the  Phyfeter  ; and 
the  Malleus  is  more  fixed  in  its  place  than  in  Man. 

I found,  that  they  have  likewife  an  Euflachian  Tube,  or 
Internal  Meatus  Auditorius  t,  and  that  Cells,  much  larger  in 
proportion  than  thofe  of  our  Maftoid  Procefs,  communicate 
with  the  Cavity  of  their  Tympanum.  See  Tab.  V.  Fig.  5. 
and  Tab.  XXXV.  Fig.  5,  6.  on  Fifhes. 

Their  Cochlea  and  Semicircular  Canals,  I obferved,  were 
analogous  to  ours. 

When 


4 See,  in  Table  VI.  *,  a Figure  of  this,  of  its  Natural  Size,  taken  from  a 
Preparation  I received  lately  from  Mr  Clapertqn. 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  WHALES. 


20$ 


When  I firft  publiflied  on  the  fubjed,  I thought  it  unne- 
ceffary  to  trace  their  Semicircular  Canals  with  accuracy. 
But  finding,  by  Dr  Camper’s  Letter,  that  he,  after  having 
diffeded  various  Species  of  the  Whale,  perfifled  in  denying 
their  exigence,  I have  refumed  the  fubjed  with  greater  at- 
tention : And,  after  finding  that  I had  been  under  no  mif~ 

take  in  defcribing  Semicircular  Canals,  I afked  Mr  Fyfe  to 
bellow  fome  pains  in  tracing  their  whole  Extent,  firft  in  the 
Delphinus  Phocaena,  and  afterwards  in  the  Delphinus  Delphis, 
and  in  the  Cete  Phyfeter  Macrocephalus  or  Spermaceti  Whale, 
which  laft  Dr  Camper  had  diffeded  , and  to  draw  accurate 
Figures  of  them  to  which,  and  their  Explanation,  I refer 
the  Reader.  See  Tab.  V.  and  Tab.  VI. 

On  viewing  thefe  Figures,  the  Reader  will  obferve,  that 
the  Cochlea  in  the  Cete  Phyfeter  is  much  larger  than  in 
Man,  but  that  the  Semicircular  Canals  are  fmaller  : And, 

fo  far  as  I have  examined  the  Ear,  I have  found,  that  the 
Semicircular  Canals  in  Man,  bear  a larger  proportion  to  the 
Cochlea,  than  they  do  in  the  Quadruped  or  Whale. 


D d 


CHAP 


\ 


/, 


^ . ' 


•I 


1 : . 


, ; ’ ,1 ■:  r,  , 


*•'  ■ 


* 


CHAP.  IV. 


Of  the  Ear  in  Cartilaginous  Fifties. 


T>  EFORE  I publiftied  my  Work  on  Fifties,  I had  exa- 
mined this  fubjed  with  great  attention  ; and  have  the 
fatisfadion  to  find,  on  repeating  my  experiments,  that  my 
obfervations  were  corred  in  every  refped  : So  that  the 

defcriptions  I am  about  to  give,  contain  a repetition  of  what 
I formerly  publiftied,  but  illuftrated  with  more  elegant  Fi- 
gures drawn  by  Mr  Fyfe. 


D d 2 


I ftiall 


208 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  CARTILAGINOUS  FISHES. 


I fhall  confine  my  defcriptions  chiefly,  and  almofl  entire- 
ly, to  the  Skate  Fiili 

In  the  upper  and  back  part  of  the  Head  of  a Skate,  and 
in  a large  Fifh  weighing  150  pounds,  at  the  diftance  nearly 
of  One  Inch  from  the  Articulation  of  the  Head  with  the 
Firft  Vertebra  of  the  Neck  or  Atlas,  Two  Orifices,  capable 
of  admitting  fmall-fized  flocking- wires,  at  the  diflance  of 
about  an  Inch  and  Quarter  from  each  other,  furrounded 
with  a firm  membranous  Ring,  may  be  obferved.  See 
Tab.  VII.  Fig.  1,  2,  3.  Letters  a a a a.  Thefe  are  the  Be- 
ginnings of  the  Meatus  Auditorii  Externi. 

If  the  Finger  be  applied  a little  farther  forwards  and  in- 
wards than  one  of  thefe  Orifices,  and  PrefTure  made  with  it, 
a White  Vifcid  Matter  will  generally  be  fqueezed  out  at  the 
Orifice. 

If 


* See  Tab.  VII.  in  the  Firft  Figure  of  which  the  parts  are  reprefented  as  they 
appear  on  difleftion.  In  Figures  Second  and  Third,  they  are  reprefented  as  they 
appeared,  in  a Fifh  weighing  150  pounds,  after  being  ftretched  with  melted  wax 
icje&ed  into  them. 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  CARTILAGINOUS  FISHES. 


2C§ 


If  a Small  Probe  be  introduced  at  the  Orifice,  and  a Cut 
made  upon  the  Point  of  the  Probe,  we  difcover  a Winding 
Canal,  nearly  two  lines,  or  the  flxth  part  of  an  inch,  in  Dia- 
meter, which  defcribes  more  than  three-fourths  of  a Circle. 
See  the  fame  Figures,  Letters  b b b b.  This  Winding  Canal 
may  be  compared  to  the  Concha  of  our  External  Ear, 

From  the  Concha,  a Straight  Paflage,  capable  of  admitting 
a finall  ftocking-wire,  leads  outwards  and  downwards,  (See 
in  the  fame  Figures  the  Letters  c c c ),  to  terminate  in  a 
Large  Sac  d d d d which  we  may  compare  to  the  Veffible 
in  the  Human  Body  ; and  which,  in  the  Skate,  contains  a 
very  vifcid  pellucid  Humour,  like  the  glaire  of  an  egg,  and 
likewife  a foft  cretaceous  Subxlance, 

On  the  anterior  part  of  the  Large  Sac,  there  is  a much 
Smaller  Sac  e e e e,  containing  fimilar  Matter,  and  communi- 
cating freely  with  the  Large  Sac  at  the  Letters  ////;  and 
at  the  pofterior  part,  there  is  a third  very  Small  Bag,  like- 
wife containing  cretaceous  Matter,  projecting  from  and  com- 
municating with  the  Large  Bag, 

We  next  find  Three  Semicircular,  or  rather  Circular,  Mem- 
branous Canals,  In  each  of  them,  there  is  a Bulb  or  dila- 
ted 1 


210 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  CARTILAGINOUS  FISHES. 


ted  part.  All  of  them  are  inclofed  within  Cartilaginous 
Canals,  lined  with  Perichondrium,  which  are  confiderably 
larger  than  the  Membranous  Canals.  The  Membranous 
Canals  are  filled  with  vifcid  pellucid  Humour,  like  to  that 
which  is  within  the  Veftible  ; and  a Fluid  refembling  this, 
is  lodged  between  the  Perichondrium  and  the  Membranous 
Canals  ; and  thefe  are  tied  to  each  other  by  Cellular 
Threads,  on  which  Arteries,  correfponding  Veins,  Lympha- 
tics, and  very  minute  Nerves,  are  difperfed.  See  Table 
XXXVII.  Fig.  4.  of  my  Work  on  Filhes. 

One  of  thefe  Canals  is  Anterior,  See  Tab.  VII.  Fig.  1,  2,  3. 
Letters  h i k l 0 $ and  the  part  k is  almoft  over  the  part  0 , 
or  this  Canal  may  be  called  Anterior  Perpendicular  : At  l 

its  Bulb  is  found.  The  Second  or  Middle  Canal  m n , is 
placed  almoft  horizontally  ; and  its  Bulb  is  feen  at  ?i. 

The  Anterior  and  Horizontal  Canals  join  together,  and 
the  wide  Canal  i h 0 is  common  to  them.  This  Canal, 
common  to  the  Anterior  and  Horizontal  Canals,  commu- 
nicates with  the  Small  Sac  e,  by  means  of  the  Membranous 
Tube  g. 


The 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  CARTILAGINOUS  FISHES. 


2,11 


The  Third  Circular  Canal  is  Pofterior,  and  one  half  of  ft 
is  over  the  other  ; fo  that  it  may  be  called  Pofterior  Per- 
pendicular Canal.  See  q r f.  Its  Bulb  is  at  J\  This  Ca- 
nal communicates  with  the  Large  Sac  or  Veftible,  by  means 
of  the  Ducft  p ; but  has  no  direcft  communication  with  either 
of  the  other  two  Circular  Canals. 

Upon  the  whole,  then,— The  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus 
leads  to  the  Cavity  of  the  Veftible.  From  this  there  is  a 
Paflage  into  a Smaller  Sac,  and,  at  the  fame  place,  a Ducft 
leads  into  the  Membranous  Canal  which  is  common  to  the 
Anterior  and  Horizontal  Canals.  From  the  Pofterior  Part 
of  the  Veftible,  a Canal  makes  a Communication  between  the 
Veftible  and  the  Pofterior  Canal.  But  the  Anterior  and  the 
Horizontal  Canal  have  no  direcft  Communication  with  the 
Pofterior  Canal. 

It  appears,  then,  that  from  the  Meatus  Auditorius  there  is 
a Paflage  into  the  Large  Sac  or  Veftible  ; and  that  from 
the  Forepart  of  the  Veftible,  there  is  a Paflage  into  the 
Small  Sac,  and,  at  the  fame  place,  into  the  Canal  which  is 
common  to  the  Anterior  and  Florizontal  Canals  ; and  that, 
from  the  Backpart  of  the  Large  Sac  or  Veftible,  there  is  a 

Paflage 


212 


OF  THE  EAR  IN  CARTILAGINOUS  FISHES. 


PafTage  into  the  Pofterior  Canal ; and,  hence,  that  all  parts 
of  the  Veftible  and  Circular  Canals  may  be  diredly  affeded, 
in  the  living  animal,  or,  after  death,  may  be  injeded,  through 
the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus. 


CHAP. 


CHAP.  V. 


Summary  of  the  Chief  Circumftances  above 
defcribech 

S feveral  of  the  principal  Fadts  I have  defcribed,  have, 


mofi  unaccountably,  been  called  in  queftion,  by  Dr 
Camper  and  Profeflbr  Scarpa,  I find  myfelf  under  the  dif- 
agreeal-le  neceflity  of  enumerating,  in  a fummary  way,  the 
Chief  Points,  refpe&ing  the  Organ  of  Hearing  in  Man  and 
other  Animals,  in  which,  I apprehend,  I have  added  to  the 
former  flock  of  knowledge  } and  of  then  fubjoining  the  At- 
teftation  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh  concerning 


them, 


E e. 


Ac  In 


414  SUMMARY  OF  THE  CHIEF  CIRCUMSTANCES 


A.  In  the  Human  Body,  I have  {hewed,  That  the  Nerves 
of  the  Veftible  and  Semicircular  Canals,  as  well  as  thofe  of 
the  Cochlea,  pafs  through  numerous  Small  Holes  or  Cribri- 
form Plates  of  the  Os  Petrofum 

B.  That  all  the  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis  which  fup- 
ply  the  Cochlea,  pafs  through  innumerable  Small  Holes  of 
a Thin  Conical  Cribriform  Plate  which  forms  the  Modio- 
lus f. 


C.  That  minute  Nerves  pafs  through  the  Axis  of  the 
Modiolus,  to  perforate  that  part  of  the  Cribriform  Plate 
which  Js  common  to  it  and  to  the  Infundibulum,  to  fupply 
the  Infundibulum  and  that  part  of  the  Cochlea  which  it  in- 
cludes 

D.  That 


* See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXIX, 
f See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXIX. 


+ See  Nervous  Sjftem?  Tab.  XXXL 


ABOVE  DESCRIBED. 


a*5 

D.  That  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis  pafs  along  and  be- 
tween the  Lamellae  of  the  Qfleous  Septa  which  divide  the 
Cochlea  into  its  Gyri  * ; or,  that  all  of  them  are  not  con- 
ducted by  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  as  Scarpa  has  defcribed  and 
delineated  f . 

E.  That  the  Nerves,  in  their  whole  courfe,  particularly 
along  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  join  and  again  are  feparated,  fo 
as  to  form  a molt  elegant  Plexus  in  which  new  Combina- 
tions  of  the  Nerves  are  formed  j:. 

F.  That  the  Nerves  terminate  on  the  Inner- tides  of  the. 
Ofleous  Gyri,  in  a demipellucid  foft  pulpy  Membrane,  re- 
fembling  the  Retina  of  the  Eye  |j. 

E e 2 G.  That 


* See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  and,  of  this  Treatife,  Tab.  I1II. 
f Scarpa,  P.  55.  and  Tab.  VIII. 
t See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab,  XXXI. 

||  See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  and,  of  this  Treatife,  Tab.  IIL 


■2i6 


SUMMARY  OF  THE  CHIEF  CIRCUMSTANCES 


G.  That  this  foft  pulpy  Membrane  is  not  the  Periofteum 
of  the  Cochlea  ; but  as  different  from  it,  as  the  Pleura  is 
from  the  Periofteum  of  the  Ribs. 

H.  In  Whales,  I have  found  an  Euftachian  Tube,  which 

had  not  been  defcribed  by  Authors  : I have  ftiewn,  that 

Semicircular  Canals  are  not  wanting,  as  was  affirmed  by  Dr 
Camper  ; and,  in  the  Porpoife,  I obferved,  that  the  Mem- 
branous Subftance,  within  the  Gyri  of  the  Cochlea,  on  which 
the  Portio  Mollis  is  diftributed,  might  be  feparated  from  the 
Periofteum  of  the  Cochlea  ftill  more  eafily  than  in  Man 

I.  In  the  Tortoife,  as  an  example  of  the  Amphibia,  I 

have  defcribed  the  Euftachian  Tubes,  and  the  Connexion  of 
the  feveral  parts  of  the  Ear,  more  accurately  than  had  been 
done  by  former  Authors  f : 'And  it  may  be  worth  while  to 

add,  that  the  Toad,  as  well  as  the  Frog,  is  provided  with 
an  Euftachian  Tube,  as  this  is  denied  by  Geoffroy 

K.  In 


* See  Book  on  Fifties,  Tab.  XXXV.  and,  of  this  Treatife,  Tab.  V. 
f See  Book  on  Fifhes,  Tab.  XXXVI. 


| Geoffroy  fur  1’Organe  de  1'Oul'e,  1778,  p.  65,— 71. 


ABOVE  DESCRIBED, 


217 


K.  In  Tome  of  the  Pifces  of  Linnaeus,  I have  not  only 
defcribed  and  painted  the  Connexion  of  the  Semicircular 
Canals,  and  of  Sacs  which  may  be  compared  to  our  Veftible ; 
but  I have  traced,  with  accuracy,  the  Courfe  and  Termina- 
tion of  their  Nerves  *. 

L.  In  the  Skate  and  Angel  Fifli,  I have  difcovered  the 
Orifices  of  the  Meatus  Auditorii  ; fhewn  the  Winding  of 
their  Conchae  Aurium  5 the  Terminations  of  their  Meatus 
Auditorii  in  the  Veftibles  ; the  Communications  of  their  Se- 
micircular Canals  with  each  other  and  with  the  Veftibles  5 
and  Diftribution  of  their  Auditory  Nerves,  and  of  the  Cir- 
culating and  Lymphatic  VefTels  of  their  Ears  f. 

M.  Particularly,  I proved,  that  the  Semicircular  Ca- 
nals in  Fifties  were  much  fmaller  than  the  Oneous  or 
Cartilaginous  Tubes  which  inclofed  them  $ and  that,  fo 
far  from  their  being  compofed  of  the  Periofteum  or  Peri- 
chondrium of  thefe  Canals,  there  was  a conftderable  Space 

between 


* See  Book  on  Fillies,  Tab,  XXXIX, 

f See  Book  on  Fifties,  Tab,  VII,  XXXVII-  XXXVIIL  and,  of  this  Treatife, 
Tab.  VI.  VII. 


21 8 SUMMARY  OF  THE  CHIEF  CIRCUMSTANCES,  &c. 


between  them,  and  the  Periofteum  or  Perichondrium,  filled 
with  Fluid,  contained  in  a Cellular  Subftance,  on  which  mi- 
nute Nerves,  with  numerous  Circulating  and  Abforbing  Vef- 

fels,  were  difperfed,  and  conducted  to  the  Perichondrium  and 

/ 

Periofteum  I obferved  farther,  That  in  certain  Fifties, 
of  the  genus  Gadus,  Spheroidal  Bodies,  which  I had  difco- 
vered,  making  in  them  part  of  the  Nervous  Syftem,  were 
difperfed  in  the  Cellular  Subftance,  between  the  Semicircular 
Canals  and  the  Periofteum  of  the  Tubes  which  contain, 
them  f. 

CHAP, 


* See  Book  on  Fifties,  Tab.  XXXVII.  XXXVIII.  XXXIX, 


•f  See  Book  on  Fifties,  Tab.  XXXIX, 


CHAP 


VI 


Atteftation  as  to  the  Fafts  above  defcribed, 


TTAVING  fully  defcribed,  and  illuftrated  by  Tables,  the 
-*■  Chief  Parts  of  the  Ear  in  the  different  Clafles  of  Ani- 
mals ; and  having  enumerated  the  particular  Circumflances 
I have  difcovered  which  were  unknown  to  former  Writers  m? 
I fhall  now  add  the  Atteftation  of  the  Royal  Society  of 
Edinburgh  refpeding  fuch  fads  as  have  been  called  in  que- 
ftion  by  Dr  Camper  and  Profeftbr  Scarpa. 


At 


220 


ATTESTATION  AS  TO  THE  FACTS 


At  their  Meeting,  in  May  1794,  I prefented  to  the  Society 
the  following  Letter  : 

“ Gentlemen, 

“ AS  one  purpofe  of  your  Society  is  to  afcertain  fuch 
“ Fa&s  as  are  defcribed  by  your  Members  or  Correfpondents, 
“ I take  this  liberty  to  requeft  of  you  to  appoint  a Commit- 
“ tee,  confiding  of  thofe  Members  whom  you  may  fuppofe  to 
“ be  the  mod:  competent  Judges  of  Anatomical  Matters,  to 
“ examine  certain  Subje&s  of  which  I propofe  to  give,  foon, 
u fome  account  to  the  Society,  illudrated  with  Figures. 

u I am, 

u Gentlemen,. 

“ Your  mod;  obedient  Servant, 

Edinburgh,  ~6 
May  2.  1794.  _f 

“ Alexr.  Monro. 

“ To  the  President  and  Other  Members  of  the  Royal 
u Society.” 


ABOVE  DESCRIBED. 


221 


They  accordingly  appointed  a large  Committee  of  their 
number,  with  a general  invitation  to  any  others  of  their 
Members  who  might  cjioofe  to  be  prefent. 


In  confequence  of  this,  the  following  Gentlemen  met,  on 
the  9th  of  July  1794,  in  the  Anatomical  Theatre,  at  Mid- 
day, that  they  might  have  the  advantage  of  examining  my 
Dilfe&ions  and  Preparations  with  a clear  light  : 


Profeflbrs  of  Medicine. 


Mr  John  Robison,  Profeflor  of  Natural  Philofophy. 

Mr  Dugald  Stewart,  Profeflor  of  Moral  Philofophy, 
Mr  Playfair,  Profeflor  of  Mathematics. 

Dr  Black, 

Dr  Francis  Home, 

Dr  Rutherford, 

Dr  Gregory, 

Dr  Duncan, 

Dr  Rqtheram,  Phylician. 

Dr  Wright,  Phylician. 

Dr  Charles  Stuart,  Phylician, 

Dr  Thomas  Spens,  Phylician. 

Mr  J ames-  Russel*  Surgeon. 


F f 


Along 


22  2 


ATTESTATION  AS  TO  THE  FACTS 


Along  with  each  of  the  Figures  which  I now  publifh,  I 
demonftrated  the  Preparation  from  which  it  was  delineated  : 
And  it  is  to  be  obferved,  that,  in  the  Cartilaginous  Fifties, 
I had  inje&ed,  from  the  Orifice  of  their  Meatus  Auditorius 
Externus,  not  only  Air  and  Quickfilver,  but  melted  coloured 
Wax,  into  their  Vefiible  and  Semicircular  Canals;  and  that 
I have  about  twenty  fuch  Preparations  in  my  pofleflion. 

The  Committee,  after  having  attentively  examined  thefe, 
hereby  declare,  That  the  Tables  and  Preparations  correfpond 
exactly  ; and  that  they  faw  diftindlly,  in  the  Preparations, 
all  that  is  reprefented  in  the  Tables. 


1795.  May  14. 

On  the  14th  day  of  May  1795,  I made  the  following 
Demonftration  to  my  Colleagues,  Dr  Home,  Dr  Gregory, 
Dr  Rutherford,  and  Dr  Duncan. 

In  Two  Large  Skates,  one  the  Raia  Laevis,  the  other  the 
Raia  Afpera  or  Thornback,  I pointed  out,  with  a Probe,  the 
Orifices  of  the  Meatus  Auditorii  Externi. 


I then 


ABOVE  DESCRIBED. 


223 


I then  prefled  with  my  finger  on  the  Fore  and  Inner  Sides 

of  thefe  Orifices,  and  fhewed  them,  that  a white  vifcid  Mat- 

ter was  difcharged  from  them. 

A Sedtion  was  next  made  on  the  Right  Side  of  both  Fiflies, 
and  the  Vefiible  and  Semicircular  Canals  of  the  Ear  were 
laid  in  view,  without  opening  their  Cavities. 

A Small  Iron  Tube,  fixed  to  a Large  Glafs  Tube,  was 

then  introduced  into  the  Orifice  of  the  External  Meatus  Au- 

ditorius,  and  Quickfilver  was  poured  into  the  Glafs  Tube. 
The  Quickfilver  entered  readily,  and  filled  the  Concha,  and 
ftretched  the  Skin  over  it  fo  that  its  Shape,  Size,  and 
Winding,  could  be  eafily  difiinguiflied.  From  the  Concha, 
the  Quickfilver  palled  readily  into,  and  diftended,  the  Great 
Sac,  which  contains  the  Cretaceous  Matter.— The  Paflage  of 
the  Quickfilver  from  the  Meatus  Externus  Auditorius  into 
the  Sac  or  Vefiible,  was  feen  diftimfily  ; becaufe  the  Mea- 
tus terminates  in  that  part  of  the  Vefiible  which  contains 
the  clear  vifcid  Matter,  which  is  lodged  between  the  upper 
and  outer  or  pofterior  part  of  the  Sac  of  the  Vefiible  and 
the  Cretaceous  Matter. 


Ff  2 


Thev 


224 


ATTESTATION  AS  TO  THE  FACTS,  &c. 


They  again  examined  the  feveral  Preparations  in  which 
the  Concha,  Meatus  Auditorius,  Veftible  and  Semicircular 
Canals,  are  filled  with  Wax  of  different  colours  in  order  to 
Ihew  the  Communication  of  thefe  Parts,  and  they  compared 
the  Tables  with  the  Preparations. 


CHAP. 


I 

CHAR  VII. 


Remarks  on  Profeffor  Scarpa’s  Book  on 
the  Ear* 


T^IEFORE  concluding,  I find  myfelf  under  the  difagreeable 
neceffity  of  pointing  out  the  Injuftice  of  certain  Criti- 
cifms  of  Profellor  ScaPvP  a,  and  of  enumerating  the  many  un- 
accountable Overfights  and  Errors  he  has  committed  ; and 
I fhall  quote  the  exprefllons  he  has  thought  himfelf  at  liber- 
ty to  employ. 


SECT, 


326  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


SECT.  I. 

In  his  Preface,  p.  3.  1.  25.  he  has  aflerted  : “ Nam 

quidquid  nuperrime  Monrous  docuit  de  Acuftici  Nervi 
“ Diftributione  per  Laminam  Cochleae  Spiralem,  nihil  aliud 
“ ell  praeter  mirificse  fabricae  fpecimen  ; nec  qua  ratione 
u Auditorius  Nervus  ad  Utrumque  Scalarum  Cochleae  Gy  rum 
pertingat,  nec  quo  abeat  Nervus  ille  qui  per  Centrum  et 
e‘  Axin  JModioli  defcendit,  Vir  alioquin  cl.,  nobis  patefe- 
“ cit.” 

The  Reader,  however,  will  obferve,  that  I have  not  only 
•every  year,  fince  1756,  fhewed,  in  my  Anatomical  Courfes, 
the  Preparation  from  which  the  Figure  I publifhed  was  de- 
lineated ; but  that  it  was  particularly  examined,  before  I 
publifhed,  by  the  following  Gentlemen  : Dr  Smith,  Reader 

of  Anatomy  in  Oxford  5 Dr  Soemmering,  Dr  Meckel  ju- 
nior, Mr  Luther,  Dr  Black,-  Dr  Hutton,  Dr  Ruther- 
ford: (See  my  Book  on  the  Nervous  Syflem,  p.  45.)  : And 

that  I hill  preferve  the  Preparation  and,  on  examining  it 
again,  after  reading  the  above  aflertion,  I find  nothing  ma- 

% terially 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR. 


227 


terially  wrong  in  the  Figure.- But,  what  is  more  diredly 

in  point,  fo  inconfiftent  is  Dr  Scarpa,  that,  in  the  55th  page* 
of  his  Work,  where  he  defcribes  the  Pencils  of  Nerves  pall- 
ing from  the  Modiolus  along  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  he  quotes 
my  Book  in  the  following  words  : “ Horum  Penicillorum 

“ fpecimen  vide  apud  Monroum,  Nerv.  Syft.”  And  if  the 
Reader  will  take  the  trouble  of  comparing  the  Figures  I 
publidied,  (See  Nervous  Syftem,  Tab.  XXXI.  Fig.  1,  2, 
3,  4.),  with  ProfefTor  Scarpa’s  Figures,  (Nat.  Difq.  Tab.  VII, 
Fig.  1,  2.),  he  will  find,  that  they  correfpond  fo  much,  in. 
every  general  and  material  refped,  that  His  Figure  feemS' 
little  more  than  the  Tranfcript  of  mine.  They  differ  chief- 
ly in  the  way  in  which  the  Nerves  are  prefented  to  view. 
In  my  Preparation,  I took  off,  with  great  pains,  the  whole 
Outer  Ofleous  Shell  of  the  Cochlea,  and  then  lifted  out  the 
Modiolus  and  Lamina  Spiralis,  fufpended  by  the  Portio  Mol- 
lis ; fo  that  the  whole  Diftribution  of  the  Nerve  on  the. 
Lamina  Spiralis  is  feen  : Whereas  Profefibr  Scarpa  has  cut 

open  one  fide  only  of  the  Cochlea. 

I will  farther  venture  to  a fie  rtf'  that  although  Profeffon 
Scarpa’s  Figures  are  more  ihewy  and  elegant  than  my  firft 

Figures- 


228  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


Figures  were,  yet  mine  give  a more  diftind  and  accurate 
Reprefentation  of  Nature. 

He  next  alleges,  That  I had  not  fhewn  how  the  Nerves 
go  to  the  Gyri  of  the  Cochlea,  as  if  he  had  fhewn  this  bet- 
ter than  I had  done.  But  let  the  Reader  compare  our  Fi- 
gures ; he  will  find,  that  Profeffor  Scarpa  does  not  paint 
the  Nerves  fo  far  as  I had  done  in  my  Book  on  the  Nervous 
Syflem.  I painted  them  as  far  as  diftind  Branches  could 
be  feen  with  a Microfcope  which  magnified  the  objed  to 
thirty  diameters.  My  defcriptions,  when  I publifhed  on  the 
Nervous  Syftem,  were  indeed  very  concife  ; becaufe  I had 
the  intention  of  profecuting  the  fubjed  ft  ill  more  fully  than 
I had  then  done. 

In  the  next  place,  it  is  to  be  remarked,  that  One-half  of 
the  Nerves  the  Scalae  of  the  Cochlea  receive,  has  efcaped 
the  obfervation  of  Profeffor  Scarpa  *9  to  wit,  All  thofe  which 
run  along  the  Offeous  Septa  to  fupply  the  Outer-part  of  each 
Scala,  or  that  Part  of  each  Scala  which  is  mo  ft  diftant  from 
the  Lamina  Spiralis, 

But 


* See  Scarpa,  Cap.  III.  Be  Nervo  Auditorio,  § viii.—xu.  p.  54,  55,  S6- 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR. 


229 


But  I mufl  farther  obferve,  that  Profeflor  Scarpa,  who 
defcribes  the  Portio  Mollis  as  terminating  in  the  Periodeum 
of  the  Cochlea,  has  neither  attended  properly  to  the  Analo- 
gy of  the  Optic  Nerves,  nor  to  the  Strudure  of  the  Mem- 
branes within  the  Cochlea  } for,  from  the  defcription  and 
reafons  I have  given,  it  is  evident,  that  the  Periofleum,  and 
the  Pulpy  Membrane  in  which  the  Portio  Mollis  of  the  Co- 
chlea terminates,  are  Diftind  Membranes,  the  former  having 
the  Common  Strudure,  and  the  latter  refembling  the  Retina 
of  the  Eye. 


SECT.  II. 

In  my  Book  on  Fillies,  p.  49.  I obferved,  That  in  each  of 
the  Membranous  Semicircular  Canals,  both  in  the  Odeous  and 
in  the  Cartilaginous  Fillies,  there  is  a Dilatation  or  Pouch  : 
and,  That  the  Membranous  Canals  are  fo  much  fmaller,  than 
the  Canals  of  Cartilage  or  Bone  which  contain  them  5 that, 
between  them  and  the  Cartilage  or  Bone,  there  is  a vifcid 
watery  Liquor,  contained  in  a Cellular  Subflance,  on  the 
Threads  of  which,  Circulating  and  Abforbent  Velfels,  and 
Nerves,  are  difperfed.  (£.)  See  Tab.  XXXVXL 

G g 


I likewife, 


230  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


I likewife,  after  defcribing  the  Size  and  Courfe  of  the 
Nerves,  obferved,  in  treating  of  the  Cartilaginous  Fifhes, 
That  “ the  Nerves,  after  reaching 'the  Sacs  and  Canals,  and 
“ running  a little  way  upon  their  Membranes,  lofe  their 
il  White  Colour,  become  Pellucid,  and  difappear.”  In 
Tab.  XXXVII.  thefe  Nerves  are  delineated  from  very  large 
Fifhes.  And,  fpeaking  of  the  OITeous  Fifhes,  p.  51.  I ob- 
ferved, That  “ very  large  Nerves  are  fixed  to  the  Bulbous 
“ Parts  of  the  Semicircular  Canals,  and,  fpreading  out  on 
“ thefe  Canals,  they  become  fuddenly  Pellucid.”  See 
Tab.  XXXIX. 

Still,  however,  other  purfuits  diverted  me  from  the  inten- 
tion I had  long  had,  of  tracing  the  whole  Diftribution  jof 
the  Portio  Mollis  in  the  Human  Ear. 

In  1789,  that  is,  four  years  after  my  Book  on  Fifhes  ap- 
peared, Profeflor  Scarpa  publifhed  his  Defcription  of  the 
Membranes  and  Nerves  of  the  Human  Semicircular  Canals  : 
And,  although  it  is  evident,  as  he  does  not  appear  to  have 
known  any  thing  of  the  matter  when  he  publifhed  his  “ Ob- 
“ fervationes  de  Feneftra  Rotunda  et  Tympano  Secundario” 
in  1772,  and  as  he  had  then  read  my  Works  on  the  Ner- 
vous Syftem  and  on  Fifties,  that  he  was  led  by  the  firft:  of 

thefe 


K 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR. 


23  r 


thefe  to  examine  the  Nerves  of  the  Cochlea,  and,  on  the 
fuppolition  of  analogy,  to  examine  the  Veftible  and  Semicir- 
cular Canals  in  Man  ; yet,  inftead  of  acknowledging  this, 
he  tries  to  infinuate,  that  I had  not  traced  the  Nerves  of 
the  Semicircular  Canals  in  Fillies  to  their  proper  places,  in 
order  to  give  the  appearance  of  originality  to  his  own  de- 
scriptions. Yet,  after  joining  me  with  Mr  John  Hunter 
as  the  author  of  an  aflertion  which  Mr  Hunter  alone  made, 

3*  ' ; 

— where  he  fays,  (in  a note,  p.  15.)  “ J.  Hunterus  et  Mon- 
“ rous  alferuerunt  Canales  Pifcium  Semicirculares,  Nervos 
“ intus  non  fufcipere  f’  adding,  “ Qua  Super  re  vereor  quam 
“ maxime  Viros  cl.  examinafte  tantummodo  Cylindros,  non 
{(  quidem  Ampullas  limul  Canalium  Seinicircularium  in  Pifci- 
e(  bus,” — he,  in  the  fame  note,  refutes  the  truth  of  his  alle- 
gation, by  Subjoining  the  following  quotation  from  my  Book  : 
“ Et  Mqnrous,  loc.  cit.  “ After  reaching  the  Sacs  and  Ca- 
“ nals,  and  running  a little  way  upon  their  Membranes, 
“ they  loSe  their  white  colour,  become  pellucid,  and  difap- 
“ pear.”  And  with  this  description  of  mine,  that  of  Pro- 
feflor  Scarpa  exadly  coincides  : (See  his  Work,  p.  34. 

§ vi.  L 7. ) : “ Neque  enim  in  Homine,  profpero  magis  Suc- 

ceftu  quam  in  PiScibus,  Reptilibus,  et  Avibus,  quantacun- 
que  adhibita  diligentia,  datum  nobis  fuit  earn  Pulpam,  ul- 

G g 2 « tra 


232  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


“ tra  Ampullaram  fines,  per  continuos  femicirculares  Ductus 
“ membranaceos,  propagatara  videre.” 

In  Tab.  VIII.  Fig.  i,  2,  3.  the  Reader  will  find  a more 
exadt  Reprefentation  of  the  Divifion  of  the  Acouftic  Nerve 
upon  the  Ampulla  than  Profeflor  Scarpa  could  have  given, 
as  it  can  be  feen  in  very  Large  Fifties  only  ; which  the 
rude  and  inaccurate  Figure  he  has  publifhed,  fhews  he  had 
not  examined. 


SECT.  III. 

Professor  Scarpa,  difiatisfied  with  the  account  I had  gi- 
ven of  the  Structure  of  the  Ear  in  the  Cartilaginous  Fifties, 
undertakes  one  more  accurate,  and  has  exprefied  himfelf  in 
the  following  terms.  His  criticifins  are  ftrangely  disjoined, 
and  unnecefiarily  repeated but  I fhall  endeavour  to  arrange 
them  fo  as  to  render  them  as  intelligible  as  pofiible. 


Praef. 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR, 


2'3’3 


Praef.  p.  2.  “ Has  ob  caufas  Organ!  Auditus  Cartilagi- 

“ neorum  Pifcium  pleniorem,  quam  adhuc  fadum  eft,  de~ 
u fcriptionem  tradere  fufcepimus.” 


(F 


Praef.  p.  1.  “ Monrous  Externum  hoc  Auditus  Odium 

“ (Rajae)  defcripferit,  fufiiis  atque  delineaverit 

“ Monroum  vehementer  fuper  hac  re  hallucinatum  fuifle. 

“ Etenim  nullum  prorfus  adeft  OJlium  Auditus  extus 

“ Adapertum  in  Cartilagineis  Pifcibus,  ejusque  loco,  fub  Af- 
“ pero  horum  Animantium  Tegumento,  Fenejira  Ovalis  repe- 
“ riunda  eft,  Membranaceo  Operculoy  a nemine  adhuc  memo- 
u rato,  obduda.” 


P.  8.  § iii.  “ In  Cartilagineis  Pifcibus  nullum  prorfas  adeft 
“ Oftium  Auditus  extus  Adapertum,  ejusque  praenunciati  Ojlii 
u loco,  fub  communibus  tegumentis,  Fenejlram  Ovalem , Operculo 
u Membranaceo  claufam,  oftendimus,”  &c. 

P.  9.  § v.  “ Igitur  in  Summitate  Capitis  Rajae  pone  Oc~ 
u ciput,  qua  nempe  cum  Prima  Colli  Vertebra  Colli  neditur, 

“ ablato  Spinofo  Tegumento, Sinuoiitas  occurrit,  in 

“ qua  Membranulae  Duae,  ovalis  figurae  Tympani  ad  modum. 
u tenfae,  confpiciendae  funt.  ...... 


?„9, 


234  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


P.  9.  § v.  in  a note  at  the  foot  of  the  page.  “ Monrous, 
u in  Opere  cui  titulus  “ Phyftology  of  Fifties,”  Sed.  III. 
“ Tab.  VII.  Fig.  1,  2.  docet  in  Raja,  prope  Junduram  Capi- 
“ tis  cum  Spina,  adefle  Foramina  duo  exigua,  quae  ad  Aures 
tl  ducunt.  Qua  in  re  vehementer  fibi  hallucinatus  eft Oftia 
*l  nimirum  Duduum  Mucoforum,  ut  manifeftum  eft,  pro  Au- 
“ ris  Meatibus  accipiens.  Etenim  omnino  nullum  eft  in 
“ Cartilagineis  Pifcibus  Oftium  Auditus  extus  Adapertum, 
li  Membranaque  Feneftrae  Ovalis  fub  Communi  Tegumento 
“ recondita  jacet  et  cooperta.” 

P.  9.  § vi.  Note  ( d.).  “ Minime  tamen  ducit  intra  Ca- 

i(  yitates  Sacculorum  Veftibuli,  quemadmodum  Monroo  vi- 
“ fum  eft  ; cujus  dodrina,  ft  vera  eflet,  ftmulque  adeflent 
il  Oftia  Auditus  Externa,  neceftario  confequeretur  liberum  ef- 
“ fe  in  Cartilagineis  Pifcibus  Aeri  et  Aquae  Acceftum  ad  fe- 
“ dem  Organi  Auditus  immediati,  ipfamque  Pulpam  Nervi 
“ Auditorii  5 quod  et  abfurdum  eft,  et  a rei  veritate  quam 
“ maxime  alienum!” 

Praef.  p.  2.  a Praeterea,  Monro  us  nefcio  quam  Organi 
u Auditus  Cartilagineorum  Pifcium  hiftoriam  confcripfit,  ut, 
M nift  vehementer  fallimur,  ex  ipfius  fententia  deducere  uni- 

“ cuique 


235 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR. 

“ cuique  liceat  in  Pifcibus  Cartilagineis  Meatum  Auditus  Ex- 
“ ternum  ducere  intra  Saccuios  Capillorum,  atque  ab  his  ad 
“ Canales  Semicirculares,  Nervumque  Auditorium  ; proin, 
“ Aquis  admixtisque  heterogeneis  particulis  nullatenus  in 
“ Cartilagineis  Pifcibus  impeditam  yiam  efle  ab  Externo  (ut 
“ ait)  Auris  Meatu,  ad  immediatam  Auditus  fedem  ; quae  res 
“ profedo  a veritate  et  perfpeda  Naturae  provident! a qusUn 
“ longillime  diftat  !” 

P.  12.  § xv.  a Interim  praeftabit  monere,  Canales  Semi- 
<e  circulares  Membranofos,  quamvis  pluribus  in  fedibus  La- 
pillorum  Sacculis  alligati  funt,  nullibi  tamen  cum  iifdem 
“ Sacculis  communicare  \ quod  iteratis  periculis,  modd 
“ Aerem,  fervata  naturali  fede,  per  Canales  Semicirculares 
“ Membranofos  infufflando,  modd  Hydrargyrum  injiciendo, 
“ cognovimus.”  — Note  (e. J.  a Minime  ignoramus  Mon- 
“ roum  in  Raja  defcripfiffe  ac  delinealfe.” 

From  the  above  quotations,  then,  it  appears,  that  Profeffor 
Scarpa,  even  after  having  read  and  Rudied  the  Defcription 
and  Figures  I had  given  of  the  Strudure  of  the  Ear  in  the 
Skate,  illuftrated  by  a number  of  Tables,  had  not  been  able 
to  difcover  the  External  Mouth,  or  Ostium,  of  the  Meatus 

Auditorius  5 


236  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


Auditorius  ; the  Concha  Auris  ; the  Continuation  of  the 
Meatus  Auditorius  ; the  Termination  of  it  in  the  Vedible, 
or  Large  Sac,  containing  vifcid  and  cretaceous  matter  ; the 
Communication  of  the  Large  Sac,  or  Vedible,  with  the 
Smaller  Sac,  nor  the  Communication  of  the  Semicircular  Ca- 
nals with  thefe  Sacs  or  Veftibles.  Yet,  in  my  experiments, 
not  only  Air  and  Quicklilver  readily  palled  in  all  dire&ions ; 
but,  in  a great  number  of  Preparations  in  my  polfellion,  all 
the  PalTages  and  Communications  I defcribed  in  my  former 
Work,  are  filled  with  melted  and  coloured  Wax,  and  were 
didin&ly  feen  by  every  Member  of  the  Committee  of  the 
Royal  Society  of  this  place,  and  by  many  Students  who  have 
examined  them. 

One  thing  only,  which  might  be  apt  to  dagger  fuch  as 
have  not  had  the  opportunity  of  feeing  my  Preparations,  re- 
mains to  be  explained  ; I mean  what  relates  to  a Fenejlra 
Ovalis,  which  is  mentioned  by  Profeflor  Scarpa,  “ Membra- 
il  naceo  Operculo  obdu&a,  a nemine  adhuc  memorata.” 

If  the  Reader  will  compare  my  Book  on  Filhes,  Tab. 
XXXVII.  Fig.  2.  with  Profelfor  Scarpa’s,  Tab.  I.  Fig.  i. 
e e , he  may  obferve  this  Fenedra  delineated  by  me,  and  a 

large 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR. 


-37 


large  pin  ftuck  through  it,  with  the  following  explanation, 
page  1 15.  1.  22.  “ Behind  the  Concha,  there  is  a Large  Soft 
“ Part,  which  is  fliewn  by  a pin  ftuck  through  it.”  I did 
not  call  it  Feneftra  Ovalis  $ becaufe,  as  I had  difcovered  a 

Meatus  Auditorius  Externus  leading  into  the  Cavity  of  the 

* 

Veftible,  I was  certain  it  had  no  analogy  to  our  Fenefcra 
Ovalis  : And  Dr  Scarpa,  though  ignorant  of  the  exigence 

of  the  Meatus  Externus,  might  have  perceived  that  it  did 
not  referable  the  Structure  of  the  Tortoife,  to  which  he  com- 
pares it,  (in  p.  16.  § xxvii.  1.  23.)  ; for,  as  he  immediately 
afterwards  obferves,  (1.  27.)  “ I11  Cartilagineis  Pifcibus  mox 
“ retro  Membranam  Feneftrte  Ovalis  omiftt  Natura  Officulum, 
“ quod  in  Reptilibus  plerifque  altera  extremitate  Tympano 
“ nexum  eft,  altera,  ftapedis  ad  modum,  Feneftram  Ovalem 
“ obftruit.” 

In  Table  VI.  Fig.  2,  3,  4.  T.  I have  given  a ftill  more 
exact  Reprefentation  of  this  Soft  Part. 

I then  fuppofed,  and  ftill  do  fuppofe,  that  Nature  has 
formed  one  part  of  the  Cafe  which  contains  the  Veftible  and 
Semicircular  Canals,  Soft  and  Flexible,  in  order  that,  by  its 
yielding,  the  Parts  within  might  be  fufceptible  of  Tremulous 

PI  h Motion- 


23'3  REMARKS  ON  PROFESSOR  SCARPA’s 


Motion  when  Sound  ads  upon  them  through  the  Meatus  Au- 

ditorius  Externus. 

After  eftabiifhing  the  fad,  that  the  Skate  and  Squalus 
Squatina  are  provided  with  a Meatus  Auditorius  Externus,  it 
mull  feem  very  fuperfluoiis  to  the  Reader  to  take  any  notice 
of  what  ProfejTor  Scarpa  has  Rated  about  the  danger  of 
Water  and  Heterogeneous  Matter  getting  into  the  Veftible 
and  Semicircular  Canals,  injuring  the  Auditory  Nerve,  &c.  : 
Yet,  I cannot  help  obferving,  that  Profellbr  Scarpa  feems  to 
have  forgotten,  not  only  that  the  Orifice  of  the  Meatus  is 
like  that  of  the  Whale  ; but  likewife,  that,  from  the  Obli- 
quity of  the  Meatus  or  Concha  under  the  Skin,  there  is  no 
more  danger  of  Air,  Water,  Sand,  &c.  getting  into  the  Ear, 
than  there  is,  that  the  Drink,  the  Chyle,  or  the  Urine,  fhall 
get  into  the  Salivary  or  Biliary  Duds  or  Ureters  ; and  like- 
wife, that  thefe  Parts  are  quite  full  of  Vifcid  Matter  in- 
elofed  in  Membranes,  incafed  in  Thick  Cartilages,  which 
therefore  will  refift  the  entrance  of  external  Fluids  or 
Solids* 


Were 


BOOK  ON  THE  EAR. 


239 


Were  it  worth  while,  I might  obferve  farther  to  him, 
That  I have,  in  the  very  fame  Animal,  difcovered  and  de- 
fcribed  two  much  larger  Palfages,  with  open  Orifices,  by 
which  the  Cavity  of  the  Abdomen  communicates  with  the 
Water  of  the  Ocean ; and,  again,  within  the  Animal, 
Tubes  by  which  the  Cavity  of  the  Pericardium  communi- 
cates with  the  Cavity  of  the  Abdomen ; yet  the  Interior 
Parts  fuffer  no  Injury 


* See  my  Book  on  Fiflies,  Tab.  XVIII.  10,  11.  29,  3©. 


H h 2 


EX- 


* 


\ 


TAB.  1. 

ZX  3- 


a 


EXPLANATION 


OF  THE 

* 

TABLES. 


Explanation  of  Table  I. 

THE  Figures  in  this  Table  give  an  accurate  Reprefenta- 
tion  of  Metal,  with  which  the  Cavities  of  the  Human  Ear, 
on  the  Right  Side  of  the  Body,  had  been  filled. 


FIG.  i,  2. 

Fig.  i.  reprefents  the  Forepart  of  the  Metal,  and  Fig.  2.  the 
Backpart  of  it. 


a Reprefents 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  I. 


Reprefents  the  Metal  which  filled  the  Ofleous  Part 
of  the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus. 

The  Ring  where  the  Membrana  Tympani  was  con- 
ne&ed. 

The  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum  filled. 

The  Root  of  the  Cells  of  the  Maftoid  Procefs  where 
they  communicate  with  the  Cavity  of  the  Tym- 
panum. 

The  Metal  which  filled  the  Cells  of  the  . Maftoid 
Procefs. 

(Fig.  i.)  The  Canal  filled  which  contained  the  Ten- 
for  Membrana  Tympani. 

The  Outer  Ofleous  End  of  the  Euftachian  Tube 
filled. 


The  Veftible  filled 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  L 


M3 


i The  Cochlea  completely  filled, 

k The  Root  of  the  Scala  Tympani  of  the  Cochlea, 

l The  Root  of  its  Scala  Veftibulh 

m (Fig.  i.)  The  Forepart  of  the  Beginning  of  the  An- 

terior Perpendicular  Semicircular  Canal  filled, 

n (Fig*  i.)  The  Forepart  of  the  Beginning  of  the  Ho- 

rizontal Semicircular  Canal  filled, 

9 The  Canal  common  to  the  Two  Perpendicular  Semi- 

circular Canals  filled. 

p q (Fig.  2.)  At  the  Places  to  which  the  dotted  lines, 
drawn  from  p and  q,  lead,  the  other  Ends  of  the 
Pofierior,  Perpendicular,  and  Horizontal,  Semicir- 
cular Canals,  are  reprefented,  filled  with  the  Metal. 


f i a 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  L 


M4 


FIG.  3,  4. 

Fig.  3.  fhews  the  Metal  with  which  the  Cochlea  had  been 
filled,  as  it  appears  when  we  look  into  the  Conical  Cavity 
M,  which  the  Modiolus  had  occupied,  and  which  was  not 
filled  with  the  Metal. 

Fig.  4.  gives  the  fame  view  of  the  Preparation  magnified  to 
Four  Diameters. 

a b c The  Scala  of  the  Tympanum  filled. 

d e Part  of  the  Scala  of  the  Veflibulum  feen  in  this 
view.  The  reft  of  it,  is  hid  by  the  Scala  of 
the  Tympanum. 


Explanation 


4 


TAB-  II. 

Tyf.  a 


or  3. 


. LA,/,  AA 


tS.  ■ fr dill  cue 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  IL 


-45 


Explanation  of  Table  IL 

\ 

The  Figures  of  this  Table  reprefent,  in  the  Ape  and  dif- 
ferent orders  of  Quadrupeds,  remarkable  Varieties  of  the 
Size  and  Shape  of  the  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum  ; and  of 
its  Communication  with  a Cavern,  or  with  Caverns,  analo- 
gous to  thofe  of  our  Maftoid  Procefs*, 

’F  I G.  i. 

Reprefents  the  Under  Part  of  the  Bones  of  the  Head  in 
the  Ape. 

A A Protuberance  in  the  Under  Part  of  the  Left  Os 

Petroftrai. 

B A fimilar  Protuberance  of  the  Right  Os  Petrofum 

cut,  to  fhew  a number  of  Cells,  without  Marrow, 
which  it  contains,  and  which  communicate  with 
the  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum. 

G A Probe  palfed  from  the  Meatus  Auditorius  into  the 

Cavity  of  the  Tympanum. 

D A Probe  palfed  through  the  Euftachian  Tube  into 

the  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum. 

Thefe  Protuberances,  therefore,  referable  in  office  our 
Maftoid  Precedes,  but  are  differently  ft  mated. 

1 i Fig.  2, 


246 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  II. 


Fig.  2.  reprefents  fimilar  Protuberances  in  the  Tiger,  and 
Fig.  3.  fuch  Protuberances  in  the  Sheep  : But,  on  cutting 

them,  Large  Caverns,  communicating  with  the  Cavity  of  the 
Tympanum,  are  found,  inftead  of  numerous  minute  Cells. 

In  the  Dog  and  the  Horfe  thefe  Protuberances  agree  fo 
much,  in  lituation  and  ftru&ure,  with  thofe  of  the  Tiger  and 
Sheep,  that  I thought  it  unneceflary  to  have  the  Drawings, 
of  them  Engraved. 

It  may  be  worth  while  to  obferve,  that,  in  the  Ape,  thefe 
Protuberances  are  fituated  as  in  the  Quadruped  ; but,  that 
their  cellular  ftru&ure  correfponds  with  that  of  the  Human 
Maftoid  Procefles. 


Explanation  of  Table  III. 

In  this  Table,  the  Ofteous  Stru&ure  of  the  Human  Co- 
chlea and  Veftible  is  reprefented. 

FIG.  i. 

This  Figure  ftiews,  on  the  Left  Side  of  the  Body,  the  Paf- 
fages  for  the  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis  into  the  Cochlea 
and  Veftible  ; and  the  Cavity  of  the  Veftible  laid  open,  on 
its  Backpart,  by  cutting  away  a Portion  of  the  Inner  and 
Pofterior  Part  of  the  Os  Petrofum. 


* The 


\ 


. I 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  III. 


'247 

* The  Inner  and  Poderior  Part  of  the  Os  Petrolum. 

a The  Bottom  of  |the  Canal  which  contains  the  Left 

Branches  of  the  Auditory  Nerves. 

b The  Canal  of  the  Portio  Dura  of  the  7th  Pair. 

c d A Cribriform  Plate,  through  which  the  Branches  of 
the  Portio  Mollis  pafs  into  the  Cochlea. 

e The  Continuation  of  the  fame  Cribriform  Plate,  form- 

ing the  Centre  and  Bottom  of  the  Cavity  of  the 
Modiolus. 

/ g Cribriform  Plates,  through  which  Branches  of  the 
Portio  Mollis  pafs  into  the  Vedible. 

b h The  Cavity  of  the  Vedible  laid  open,  by  cutting 
away  the  Bone  which  covers  its  Poderior  Part. 

i The  Foramen  Ovale. 

k A Probe  palled  from  the  Veflible,  into  the  Scala 

Vellibuli  of  the  Cochlea. 

I The  Anterior,  and  m the  Poderior,  End  of  the  Su- 

perior Semicircular  Canal. 

n The  Upper,  and  0 the  Lower,  End  of  the  Poderior 

Semicircular  Canal. 

p The  Termination,  in  the  Veflible,  of  the  Tube  which 

is  common  to  the  Superior  and  Poderior  Semicir- 
cular Canals,  or  which  is  formed  by  the  joining 
together  of  their  Ends  m n. 

q The  Fore,  and  r the  Poderior,  End  of  the  Exterior 

Horizontal  Semicircular  Canal. 


I i 2 


F I G. 


248 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  III. 


, . 


F I G.  2. 

Gives  a View,  from  above,  of  the  Cochlea,  and  Part  of  the 
Veflible  and  Semicircular  Canals,  of  the  Right  -Side,  after 
cutting  away  Part  of  the  Os  Petrofum. 
a The  Os  Petrofum. 

b The  Canal  for  the  Internal  Carotid  Artery. 

c The  Anterior  End  of  the  External  Horizontal  Semi- 

circular Canal. 

d The  Anterior  End  of  the  Superior  Semicircular 

Canal. 

e The  Upper  Part  of  the  Veflible. 

f The  Side  of  the  Cochlea  viewed  fomewhat  obliquely. 

g h i i The  Outer  Part  of  the  Modiolus,  which  is  Cribri- 

form, or  pierced  with  a number  of  Holes,  for  the 
Pailage  of  the  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis. 
k A Wire  palled  between  Two  Plates  or  Lamellae,  of 

which  the  Modiolus  confilts,  and  which  are  at  the 
greateft  di fiance  from  each  other,  and  therefore 
belt  feen  at  its  Root. 

} l The  OlTeous  Septum  between  the  Firft  and  Second 

Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea,  compofed  of  Two  Tables 
or  Plates. 

m The  OlTeous  Septum  which  feparates  the  Second  Gy- 

rus of  the  Cochlea  from  the  Infundibulum. 

■ ' • nop  The 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  III. 


i 


249 


nop  The  Firffc  Turn  of  the  Ofleous  Part  or  Root  of  the 
Lamina  Spiralis.  At  0 it  is  cut,  to  fhew  that  it 
conflfts  of  Two  Tables,  between  which  Branches 
of  the  Portio  Mollis  are  lodged,  which,  after  di- 
viding into  very  minute  Filaments,  pafs  through, 
innumerable  Holes,  which  are  delineated  on  the 
Outer  Edge  of  the  OITeous  Part  of  the  Lamina 
Spiralis. 

q The  Second  Turn  of  the  Ofleous  Part  of  the  Lamina 

Spiralis. 

r The  Termination  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis  in  a Hamus 

or  Hamulus,  the  Concave  Side  of  which  is  con- 
nected with,  or  continued  from,  the  Ofleous  Sep- 
tum my  which  divides  the  Second  Gyrus  from  the 
Infundibulum. 

/ The  Infundibulum,  at  the  Bottom  of  which  a CribrN 

form  Ofleous  Plate  is  feen,  between  it  and  the. 
Apex  of  the  Modiolus,  through  which  Nerves  pafs. 
from  the  Modiolus  into  the  Infundibulum. 
t u The  Firfl:  and  Second  Scala  of  the  Tympanum. 

v w The  Firfl:  and  Second  Scala  of  the  Yeflible. 


F I G.  3. 

In  this  Figure,  the  Side  of  the  Cochlea  is  turned  a little 
more  outwards  than  in  Fig.  2.  by  which  the  Outer  Edge  of 
the  Lamina  Spiralis,  and.  Structure  of  the  Ofleous  Septum  be- 
tween the  Scalae  of  the  Cochlea,  are  better  feen. 

a Reprefents 


25o  EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  III. 

a Reprefents  the  Bails  of  the  Cochlea. 

b The  Root  of  the  Cribriform  Modiolus. 

c The  Root  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  'which  is  likewife 

Cribriform. 

d The  Outer  Edge  of  the  OiTeous  Part  of  the  Lamina 

Spiralis,  where  the  Two  Laminae  which  compofe  it 
are  feen,  with  innumerable  Holes  for  the  Paffage 
of  the  Branches  of  the  Nerves  which  are  placed 
between  the  Laminae. 

■s  A Sedlion  of  the  OiTeous  Septum,  which  divides  the 

Firft  from  the  Second  Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea,  and 
which  conffffs  of  Two  Laminae. 

J The  Scala  Tympani,  and  g the  Scala  Veftibuli. 


FIG.  4. 

Reprefents  the  Cochlea,  and  a fmall  part  of  the  Semicircular 
Canals,  after  cutting  off  from  them  the  Fore  and  Outer  Part 
of  the  Os  Petrofum. 

a The  Fore  and  Outer  Side  of  the  Os  Petrofum. 

b The  Paffage  for  the  Internal  Carotid  Artery. 

c Part  of  the  Veftible. 

d The  Anterior  End  of  the  External  Horizontal  Semi- 

circular Canal. 

e The  Anterior  End  of  the  Superior  Semicircular  Canal. 

f The  Bails  of  the  Cochlea. 

g The  Scala  of  the  Tympanum. 


b The 


. 


•(  ' 


TAB.  TV 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  III. 


2$t 

h The  Outer  Edge  of  the  Ofleous  Part  of  the  Lamina 

Spiralis,  in  which  there  are  innumerable  Small 
Holes  for  the  Paflage  of  Nerves. 
i A Ridge  in  the  Middle  of  the  Ofleous  Part  of  the 

Lamina  Spiralis,  where  the  Two  Plates  which  com- 
pofe  it  are  at  fuch  di dance  from  each  other  as  ta 
produce  a Riling  or  Ridge. 

k k The  Ofleous  Septum  which  divides  the  Fird  from  the 
Second  Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea. 

/ The  Scala  of  the  Veflible. 

m The  Second  Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea. 
n The  Lamina  Spiralis,  terminating  in  a Hamus  or 

Hook. 

o The  Infundibulum. 

Explanation  of  Table  IV. 

The  Three  Figures  of  this  Table  reprefent  the  Didribution 
of  the  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis  ^within  the  Two  Scalae 
of  the  Cochlea,  or  the  Nervous  Webs  or  Retinae  thefe  form. 


FIG.  i. 

Reprefents  the  Didribution  of  the  Branches  of  the  Portio 
Mollis,  on  one  lide  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis. 
a The  Large  Branches  of  the  Portio  Mollis,  at  the 

Root  or  Ofleous  Part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis. 

b The 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  IV. 


The  Continuation  of  thefe  Branches  on  the  Soft  Part 
of  the  Lamina  Spiralis. 

The  Outer  Part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  feparated 
from  the  Bone  of  the  Cochlea. 

Thefe  Nerves,  in  their  whole  courfe,  form  an  intri- 
cate and  beautiful  Plexus,  by  repeatedly  joining 
into  Trunks,  and  thefe  feparating  into  Branches. 


FIG.  2. 

Reprefents  the  Modiolus. 

The  Plexus  of  Nerves  on  the  OHeous  Part  of  the 
Lamina  Spiralis. 

The  Plexus  of  Nerves  on  the  Outer  and  Softer  Part 
of  the  Lamina  Spiralis. 

The  Outer  Part  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  dividing  into 
its  two  conilituent  Layers  or  Membranes,  one  of 
which  d , continued,  lines  the  Scala  of  the  Veflible, 
and  the  other  Layer  e,  continued,  lines  the  Scala 
of  the  Tympanum. 


F I G.  3. 

Reprefents  the  Modiolus. 

The  Plexus  of  Nerves  on  the  Lamina  Spiralis. 

At  c,  the  Layer  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis,  the  Conti- 
nuation of  which  formed  the  Retina  of  the  Scala 
of  the  Tympanum,  is  cut  off. 


d Shews 


* 


\ 


' 

■ 


. 


. I 


' 


/C'lMJ,  Jr. 


* 


TAB . V 


AFy/'  dtf- 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  IV. 


253 


d Shews  the  Continuation  of  the  other  Layer  of  the 
Lamina  Spiralis  lining  the  Scala  of  the  Veftible, 
c Is  an  Incifion,  where  the  Retina  of  the  Scala  Vefti- 

buli  begins  to  be  continued  from  the  Lamina  SpL 
ralis. 

- 

Explanation  of  Table  IV.  # 

This  Table  reprefents,  of  its  Natural  Size,  a Portion  of 
the  External  Meatus  Auditorius  of  the  Cete  Balaena,  i«  of 
Linneus,  laid  open. 

A The  Outer  and  Wider  End  of  the  Meatus. 

B The  Inner  and  Narrower  Part  of  it. 

C A Smooth  Spheroidal  Body,  the  Inner  End,  or  Root, 
of  which,  D,  is  Smaller  than  its  Outer  End,  and 
is  attached  to  the  Side  of  the  Meatus. 


Explanation  of  Table  V. 

The  Firft,  Second,  Third  and  Fourth  Figures  of  this  Table, 
reprefent  the  Veftible,  Semicircular  Canals,  and  Cochlea,  of 
the  Cete  Delphinus  Phocsena  of  Linneus,  or  of  the  com- 
mon  Porpoife. 

The  Diameter  of  all  the  Parts,  which  belonged  to  the 
Right  Ear,  is  magnified  a little  ; nearly,  in  proportion  to 
the  real  Diameter,  as  Three  to  Two. 

K k 


c. 


The 


254 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


The  Same  Parts  are  pointed  out  by  the  Same  Letters  ia 

all  the  Four  Figures. 

A The  Outer-lide  of  the  Os  Petrofum. 

B The  Veftible  laid  open- 

C The  Foramen  Rotundum. 

D E (Fig-  3-)  The  Apex  and  Bails  of  the  Cochlea  opened. 

F The  Ends  of  a Wire  twilled  together,  after  palling 

it,  from  the  Foramen  Rotundum,  out  at  an  Open- 
ing made  into  the  Scala  Tympani  of  the  Cochlea. 

G The  Ends  of  a Wire  twilled  together,  after  palling 

it,  from  the  Foramen  Ovale,  out  at  an  Opening 
made  into  the  Scala  Vellibuli  of  the  Cochlea. 

H The  Ends  of  a Wire  twilled  together,  after  palling 
one  end  of  it,  from  a Hole  in  the  Superior  or  An- 
terior Semicircular  Canal,  into  the  VeRible,  and, 
from  that,  out  at  the  Foramen  Ovale. 

I The  Ends  of  a Wire  twilled  together,  after  palling 

both  ends  of  it,  from  the  Cavity  of  the  Pofterior 
Semicircular  Canal,  into  the  Veliible,  and  then  out 
at  the  Foramen  Ovale- 

Thefe  Two  Wires  are  contiguous  in  the  Canal  com- 
mon to  the  Two  Perpendicular  Semicircular  Canals. 

K A Short  Wire  put  into  one  end  of  the  Third  or  Ho- 
rizontal Semicircular  Canal. 

L The  Hole,  on  the  Backpart  of  the  Os  Petrofum,  for 
the  Pallage  of  the  Portio  Mollis,  and  Portio  Dura 
of  the  7th  Pair  of  Nerves. 


M That 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


255 


M That  Branch  of  the  Portio  Mollis,  which  furnilhed 
Nerves  to  the  Cochlea,  dried. 

N The  other  Branch  of  the  Portio  Mollis  dried,  which 
furnilhed  Nerves  to  the  Veftible  and  Semicircular 
Canals. 

FIG.  5. 

This  Figure  reprefents  the  Os  Petrofum  and  the  Parts  of 

the  Ear,  of  their  Natural  Size,  in  the  Cete  Phyfeter  Macro- 

cephalus  of  Linneus,  or  the  Spermaceti  Whale. 

A A Part  of  the  Os  Petrofum,  within  which  there  is  a 
Large  Cavity,  that  communicates  with,  or  makes 
part  of,  the  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum  B B.  This 
is,  in  Stru&ure  and  Office,  analogous  to  the  Hu- 
man Maftoid  Procels,  or  to  the  Hollow  Part  of 
the  Os  Temporum  of  the  Ape  and  Quadrupeds  re- 
prefented  in  Table  II. 

C D E The  Malleus,  Incus,  and  Stapes,  conne&ed  to  each 
other  by  Ligaments.  The  Root  of  the  Stapes  fills 
the  Foramen  Ovale. 

F A Hole  cut  in  the  Bone*  in  order  to  ffiew  the  Ca- 

vity of  the  Veftible. 

G H Two  of  the  Semicircular  Canals,  cut  open  to  their 
Terminations  in  the  Vefiible. 

I The  Scala  of  the  Cochlea  which  begins  at  the  Fora- 

men Rotundum,  which  is  called  Scala  Tympani. 

K A Probe  in  the  Scala  VeflibulL 

Kk  2 


L The 


256 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  V. 


The  Firft  Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea  cut  open,  in  which 
the  Ofieous  Root  of  the  Lamina  Spiralis  is  obfer- 
vable. 

The  Second  Gyrus  of  the  Cochlea. 

The  Hole  which  tranfmitted  the  Fordo  Mollis  of  the 
7th  Pair  of  Nerves. 

A Probe  in  the  Winding  Canal,  which  tranfmitted 
the  Portio  Dura  of  the  7th  Pair. 


Explanation  of  Table  VI, 

In  this  Table,  fome  of  the  Principal  Parts  of  the  Ear  in 
the  Cete  Delphinus  Delphis  are  reprefented. 


FIG.  1. 

Shews  the  Orifice  of  the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus. 

A The  Left  Eye. 

B The  Corner  of  the  Mouth. 

C D White  Lines  or  Streaks  on  the  fide  of  the  Head  and 
Body. 

E A Brittle  introduced  into  the  Orifice  of  the  Meatus 
Auditorius  Externus. 


FIG.  2. 

Reprefents  the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus  laid  open,  the 
Euttachian  Tube  and  Cavities  refembling  thofe  in  the  Ma- 

ftoid 


h 

M 

N 

O O 


: 


) 


)< 


* 


/ 


\ 


• / 


\ 


V 


t 


«c 


i •' 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VI, 


*57 


ftoid  Procefs,  with  which  this  Tube  and  the  Cavity  of  the 
Tympanum  communicate. 

A The  Eye. 

B The  Orifice  of  the  Meatus  Auditorius  with  a Bridle 

introduced  into  it. 

C The  Meatus  Auditorius  laid  open. 

E E Probes  introduced  into  the  Euftachian  Tubes. 

F G The  Outer  End  of  the  Tube  opening  into  Large  Cells. 
H A Bone  which  is  Hollow. 


In  FIG.  3. 

F Reprefents  the  Outer  End  of  the  Euftachian  Tube,,, 
with  a Probe  pafled  from  it  into  Large  Cells. 

Another  Probe  pafled  from  the  Outer  End  of  the 
Euftachian  Tube  into  the  Cavity  of  the  Bone  H, 
the  Lower  Part  of  which  is  cut  off,  in  order  to 
{hew  its  Cavity. 


F I G.  4. 

Shews  the  Portio  Mollis  terminating  in  the  Cochlea  and  Se- 
micircular Canal. 

A B The  Inner  Sides  of  the  Bafe  of  the  Cranium. 

C The  Trunk  of  the  Portio  Mollis. 

D The  Os  Petrofum. 

E The  Portio  Mollis  going  into  the  Modiolus. 

F G The  Sides  of  the  Cochlea  laid  open. 

H One- 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VL 


^5? 

H One  of  the  Semicircular  Canals  laid  open, 

I - The  Portio  Dura  of  the  7th  Pair. 

Explanation  of  Table  VII. 

The  Figures  in  this  Table  reprefent  the  Situation  and  Con- 
nexion of  the  feveral  Canals  of  the  Ear  in  a Skate  Filh,  of 
their  Natural  Size. 

FIG.  1. 

In  this  Figure,  the  Situation  of  the  Two  Eyes,  and  of  Two 
Paflages  which  lead  from  the  Upper  Part  of  the  Head  into 
the  Throat,  and  of  the  feveral  Parts  of  the  Brain  and  Nerves 
riling  from  it,  are  reprefented,  along  with  the  Parts  of  the 
Ear. 

AAA  A Reprefents  a Se&ion  of  the  Skin  and  other  Parts  of 
the  Upper  Side  of  the  Head  and  Spine. 

B B The  Eyes. 

C C Two  Paflages  leading  down  into  the  Throat. 

D The  Forepart  of  the  Cavity  of  the  Cranium,  which 

contains  fome  Cellular  Subftance,  and  is  filled  with 
a tranfparent  vifcid  fait  Liquor. 

E The  Brain. 

F The  Cerebellum. 

1 1 The  Olfa&ory  Nerves. 

2 2 The  Optic  Nerves. 

33  44  Nerves  which  refemble  the  3d  and  4th  Pairs. 

5 5 Nerves 


I 


% 


s 


■■ 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VII. 


259 


5 5 Nerves  which  referable  our  5th  Pair,  and  likewife 
the  Molles  of  our  7th  Pair. 

G The  Skin  covering  the  Occiput. 

H H The  Joints  of  the  Head  with  the  Spine,  or  Joining 
of  the  Condyles  of  the  Occiput  with  the  Firft 
Vertebra  or  Atlas. 

I The  Skin  covering  the  Spinal  Procedes  of  the  Verte- 

brae. 

KLM  KLM  Thick  Cartilages,  cut  horizontally,  which  cover 
and  contain  Three  Semicircular,  or  rather  Circular, 
Canals  of  the  Ear,  and  certain  Sacs,  analogous  to 
our  Veftible,  with  which  thefe  communicate. 

a a The  Mouths  or  Openings  of  the  Meatus  Auditorii  * 
Ex.erni. 

ah  ah  Winding  Canals  cut  open,  which  refemble  the  Con- 
chae  of  the  Human  Ears. 

e A Bridle  paffed  from  the  Concha  of  the  Left  Exter- 

nal Ear,  into  a draight  Meatus  Auditorius  Exter- 
nus,  and,  from  it,  into  the  Cavity  of  a Large  Sac 
d,  refembling  our  Vedible,  which  is  filled,  partly 
with  a regularly-diaped  white  foft  cretaceous  Sub- 
dance, and  partly  with  a tranfparent  vifcid  Fluid,. 

d In  the  Right  Ear,  reprefents  the  fame  Sac. 

e A Small  Sac,  lituated  on  the  Forepart  of  the  Large 

Sac  d,  containing  likewife  a Cretaceous  Subdance 
and  Vifcid  Fluid, 


* A. 


*6o  EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VII. 

* A ftill  Smaller  Sac,  or  rather  a Projedion  from  the 

Backpart  of  the  Large  Sac  d,  which  alfo  contains 
Cretaceous  Matter. 

/ The  Place  at  which  the  Large  Sac  d communicates 
with  the  Small  Sac  e . 

g A Tube  leading  from  the  Small  Sac  <?,  to  h,  which 

is  a Canal  common  to  the  Anterior  Perpendicular 
Circular  Canal  i k /,  and  to  the  Middle  Horizontal 
Circular  Canal  i m n. 

I Is  a dilated  Part  or  Bulb  in  the  Anterior  Circular 

Canal,  and  n is  a ftmilar  Bulb  in  the  Horizontal 
Circular  Canal. 

i h o A Large  Canal  common  to  the  Anterior  and  Hori- 
zontal Middle  Canal. 

p q A Canal  leading  from  the  Inner  and  Pofterior  Part 
of  the  Great  Sac  d,  to  the  Pofterior  Perpendicular 
Circular  Canal  q r f.  At  f there  is  a Bulb  in  this 
Canal,  and  at  its  Inferior  End  q it  is  Wider  than 
it  is  in  its  Upper  Part. 


FIG.  2,  3,  4. 

Much  Larger  Fifties  than  the  former  were  procured  for  the 
Preparations  reprefented  by  thefe  Three  Figures  ; and  in  the 
Preparations  reprefented  by  Fig.  2,  3.  the  Meatus  Auditorius 
Externus,  Veftible,  and  the  Circular  Canals,  were  injeded 

with 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VIL 


261 


. > 


with  melted  Wax,  tinged  with  three  different  colours,  fuch 
as  thofe  with  which  thefe  Figures  are  painted. 

In  the  Preparation  reprefented  by  Fig.  2.  the  Veftible  was 
laid  in  view  and  delineated,  before  the  inje&ion  was  thrown 
in  j and  the  Boundary  of  the  Cretaceous  Subftance  is  fcen 
at  the  letter  d. 

After  all  the  Canals  were  injeded,  in  the  Preparation  re- 
prefented by  Fig.  3.  the  Veftible  was  cut,  and  the  Wax  taken 
out  of  it,  that  its  Communications  with  the  Meatus  Audito- 
rius  Externus,  the  Small  Anterior  Sac,  and  the  Canal  which 
leads  to  the  Pofterior  Circular  Canal,  might  be  more  fully 
feen  and  delineated. 

The  feveral  Parts  reprefented  in  thefe  Three  Figures  are 
pointed  out  by  the  fame  letters  as  in  Fig.  1.  ; fo  that  the 
Explanation  already  given  of  Fig.  1.  beginning  with  the  let- 
ters K L M,  applies  to  Figures  2,  3,  4. 

The  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus  c paffes  under  the  Termi- 
nation of  the  Irmer-part  of  the  Middle  Horizontal  Circular 
Canal,  in  the  Canal  i h 0,  common  to  it  and  to  the  Anterior 
Circular  Canal.  ■ 

Behind  the  Meatus  Auditorius  Externus,  the  Pofterior  Cir- 
cular Canal  is  contiguous  to  the  Horizontal  Circular  Canal, 
but  does  not  communicate  diredly  with  it  by  any  Opening. 

In  Fig.  3.  at  the  letter  T,  the  Outer-ftde  of  a large  round 
Hole  or  Aperture  in  the  Cartilage  which  inclofes  the  Vefti- 
ble and  Circular  Canals,  is  delineated  3 and,  in  Fig.  4.  at  T, 

LI  s the 


26z 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VII. 


the  Inner-fide  of  this  Hole  is  reprefented  ; and,  in  Fig.  a* 
at  the  fame  letter,  the  Place  of  the  Skin  is  pointed  out,  un- 
der which  this  Hole  is  fituated. 


Explanation  of  Table  VIII. 

In  this  Table,  the  Nerves  of  the  Veftible  and  Circular 

Canals  in  the  Right  Ear  of  a Skate  are  reprefented,  after  in- 
verting the  Head,  and  cutting  away  the  Cartilages  which  lie 

under  them. 

ABCDE  A Se&ion  of  the  Cartilages. 

F G The  Right  Side  of  the  Medulla  Oblongata. 

HI  A Nerve  which,  in  its  Diftribution,  refembles  the 

Human  5th,  and  Portio  Mollis  of  the  7th  Pair. 

IC  A Branch  of  the  Portio  Mollis  fent  to  the  Bulb  of 
the  Anterior  Circular  Canal. 

L A Branch  of  it  fent  to  the  Bulb  of  the  Middle  Ho- 
rizontal Circular  Canal. 

M A Branch  of  it  fent  to  the  Anterior  Sac  which  com- 
municates with  the  Veftible. 

N A Number  of  Branches,  forming  an  elegant  Plexus 

on  the  under  Part  of  the  Veftible. 

O Branches  fent  to  a Small  Projection  or  Sac  at  the 

Under  and  Pofterior  Part  of  the  Veftible. 

P A Branch 


TAB  vm. 


■ SL 


//r. 


J. 


/ 


EXPLANATION  OF  TABLE  VIII. 


263 


P A Branch  fent  to  the  Bulb  of  the  Poffcerior  Circular 
Canal. 

Q.  A Nerve  refembling  the  Human  Portio  Dura  of  the 
7th  Pair. 

S T Nerves  refembling  the  Human  8th  and  9th  Pairs  of 
Nerves. 


F I G.  2,  3. 

Shew,  more  fully,  the  way  in  which  the  Branches  of  the 
Portio  Mollis  terminate  in  the  Bulbs  of  the  Circular  Canals. 

a b The  Cylindrical  Parts  of  the  Circular  Canals. 

c (Fig.  2.)  Shews  the  Bulb  entire  ; and  c,  in  Fig.  3., 

fhews  the  Bulb  cut  open,  in  order  to  bring  into 
view  an  imperfed  Septum,  e , on  which  the  Nerve 
fplits  into  a great  number  of  minute  Branches ; 
which,  in  a very  large  Fifh,  weighing  upwards  of 
160  pounds,  I have  obferved  to  form  a Plexus  on 
the  Septum  ; and,  the  Branches  then  becoming 
pellucid,  it  is  impoflible  to  perceive  their  farther 
Diftribution  on  the  Cylindrical  Part  of  the  Circu- 
lar Canals. 


THE  END  OF  TREATISE  THIRD. 


* 


t. 


'o 


* 


k 4 


■ a'- 


■s- 


> 


} ' ' 


•» 


I 


. 


ft 

•*  * " 


f